Home

Garmin

Contents

1. Press the small left knob to move the tuning Auto Tuning cursor to the VLOC window Turn the small A trequency may also be quickly selected trom the left knob to select the kilohertz portion of the frequency and the large left knob to database by simply highlighting the desired frequency select the megahertz portion on the Waypoint VOR Page or the Nearest VOR Page and pressing ENT Once a frequency is selected in 2 Turn the large left knob to select the desired the standby field it may be transferred to the active megahertz MHz value For example the frequency by pressing the VLOC flip flop key Auto 117 portion of the frequency 117 80 tuning can also be performed from VLOC frequencies 3 Turn the small left knob to select the desired listed on the NAVCOM Airport Frequency and Near kilohertz KHz value For example the 80 est Flight Service Station pages portion of the frequency 117 80 11656 117 88 4 To make the standby frequency the active l A i z frequency press the VLOC flip flop key VOR Page Nearest VOR Page 162 190 00357 00 Rev H 8 VLOC RECEIVER GNS 530W only Auto tuning To select a VLOC frequency from the Waypoint To select an approach and automatically tune the VOR or Nearest VOR Pages proper VLOC frequency 1 Select the desired page trom the main pages 1 Select the destination airport using the direct See the page references on the preceding to key or as the last waypo
2. hdd mm mmm latitude and longitude in degrees and decimal minutes DIS SPD distance and speed in Nautical e hdd mm ss s latitude and longitude in nautical miles knots Statute miles miles degrees minutes and decimal seconds per hour or Metric kilometers kilometers per e MGRS Military Grid Reference System hour terms ALT VS altitude and vertical speed in Feet feet per minute Meters meters per minute or Meters meters per second e UITM UPS Universal Transverse Mercator Universal Polar Stereographic grids 4 Press ENT to accept the selected format PRESSURE barometric pressure in Inches map pagum or Millibars The Map Datum may not be changed TEMP temperature in degrees Celsius or A NOTE Per TSO C146a the WGS 84 map datum is Fahrenheit used FUEL fuel units in Gallons Imperial Gal lons Kilograms Liters or Pounds 3 Turnthe small right knob to select the desired units of measure for the selected category Press ENT to accept the selection 190 00357 00 Rev H 189 9 AUX PAGES Setup 1 Page Date Time To display local time or UTC 190 1 2 4 Select Date Time from the Setup Page The flashing cursor highlights the Time Format field Turn the small right knob to display a window of available time formats Local 12hr Local 24hr or UTC DATE TIHE Local 12 hour Local 24 hour C Continue turni
3. Note that the 500W series unit again dis plays SUSP above the OBS key Automatic waypoint sequencing is suspended at the missed approach holding point A waypoint alert Arriving at waypoint appears in the lower right corner of the screen each time you approach PMD VOR in the holding pattern When leaving the holding pattern press the PROC key to reactivate the approach or select a different approach or press direct to to select another destination 105 5 PROCEDURES ILS Approach GNS 530W only TYPE 3 Course from fix to manual sequence 2 As you depart the airfield Next DTK 026 in Course from fix to manual sequence legs appears on x sec appears in the lower right corner of the the Active Flight Plan and Map Pages with man seq in screen and SUSP appears directly above the place of a waypoint identifier An example of this type OBS key You are now on the course trom fix of course leg appears in the COASTAL TWO DEPAR to manual sequence leg The distance dis TURE from Westfield Massachusetts Barnes Muni played on the Active Flight Plan Default NAV The example leg corresponds to the departure leg from and Map pages is FROM the waypoint fix the Barnes Municipal and appears as follows on the Active departure runway in this example Flight Plan and Detault NAV Pages COASTAL TWO DEPARTURE CSI CCC aaa 271 DEPARTING BARNES MUNI Fly assigned heading and altitude for radar
4. 139 6 WPT PAGES Creating User Waypoints The following descriptions and abbreviations appear on the User Waypoint Page e REF WPT Reference waypoint identifier name RAD Radial from reference waypoint in degrees magnetic or degrees true depending upon unit con figuration Use the small and large right knobs to enter DIS Distance trom reference a name for the new waypoint When you waypoint in nautical miles stat press ENT your present position automati ute miles kilometers depending cally appears in the Position field upon unit configuration 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the e Position Latitude Longitude degrees position field at the bottom of the page minutes or degrees minutes sec onds MGRS or UTM UPS User waypoints may only be selected by name identifier Creating User Waypoints i Create User waypoints may be created from the User Waypoint Page or the Map Page To create a new user waypoint simply enter its name identifier and position or reference another waypoint by radial and distance To enter a different position highlight the position field and use the small and large right knobs to enter the new position coor To create a new user waypoint by entering its dinates latitude longitude position 4 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the te ee ey polite e aa position coordinates for the new waypoint the small ri
5. AUX page NAV WPT AUX NRST 5 7 available pages 10 available pages 4 available pages 8 available pages see Section 2 see Section 6 see below see Section 7 Flight Planning Utility Setup 1 Setup 2 190 00357 00 Rev H 165 9 AUX PAGES Flight Planning Flight Planning Page The Flight Planning Page provides access to E6B functions for fuel planning trip planning density altitude true airspeed winds aloft calculations sched uled messages and a Crossfill function to transfer flight plans user waypoints to a second 500W series unit When a flight planning item is selected the cor responding page appears providing additional informa tion and features FLIGHT PLAHHIHG To select highlight with cursor and press ENT First Page in AUX Group To select an item from the Flight Planning Page 1 Press the small right knob to activate the Cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired item and press ENT FLIGHT PLAHHIHG From the Flight Planning Page highlight the desired item and press ENT to display the corresponding option page e g Density Alt TAS Winds Page The following flight planning items are available Fuel Planning When equipped with fuel flow FF and or fuel on board FOB sensors this item displays current fuel conditions along the active direct to or flight plan You may also manually enter fuel flow ground speed GS and in some instan
6. The bottom right corner of the screen indicates the page group that is currently being displayed e g NAV or NRST the number of screens available within that group indicated by rectangular icons and the placement of the current screen within that group indicated by a highlighted rectangular icon To select a different page within the group turn the small right knob Turn Advisory and Waypoint Alert This part of the screen is also used to display the 500W series turn advisories e g Left to 209 in 9 sec and waypoint alerts e g Arriving at waypoint during flight plan and approach operations See Sec tion 5 for more information Left to 269 in 3 sec 190 00357 00 Rev H 29 2 NAV PAGES Default NAV Page Default NAV Page The first NAV page is the Default NAV Page This page may be quickly selected from ANY page by using the CLR key Bearing pointer to the current TO waypoint User selectable Data Fields all four corners Course Deviation Indicator CDI Active Leg of Flight io First Page in NAV Group or Direct to Destination To select the NAV group and display the Default NAV Page press and hold CLR The default NAV Page provides a look ahead map display with your present position at the bottom center of the page The top of the page displays desired track DTK ground track TRK and distance to destination waypoint DIS The bottom of the page indicates ground
7. contirmation window 3 With Activate highlighted press ENT 78 190 00357 00 Rev H 4 FLIGHT PLANS Flight Plan Shortcuts When using instrument procedures this feature can be used not only to activate a specific point to point leg but to also activate a departure an arrival the procedure turn portion of an approach follow a DME arc or activate a holding pattern Any approach departure or arrival can be reviewed on the appropriate airport page in the WPT page group To review a procedure while viewing a flight plan page 1 With the flight plan page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the procedure header and press ENT to select the WPT page group 190 00357 00 Rev H 79 4 FLIGHT PLANS Flight Plan Transfer Feature optional with software V 3 20 or later The Flight Plan Card feature is available for trans ferring flight plans to the unit via a Garmin proprietary data card The flight plans may be created on a PC using flight planning software that is compatible with Garmin equipment Jeppesen FliteStar is an example In addition to the flight planning software it is neces sary to purchase a flight plan transfer kit from Garmin The kit contains the required hardware including a blank data card and card programmer and Garmin software that must be installed on the PC Up to 19 flight plans and 1 000 user waypoints create
8. 190 00357 00 Rev H TERRAIN system passes the self test The TER TEST annunciator will clear after checking and no failure message appears 47 2 NAV PAGES Terrain Alerts Terrain Obstacle Database Areas of Coverage The following describes the area of coverage avail able in each database Regional definitions may change without notice Latitudes N 75 to S 60 a Longitudes W 180 to E 180 Limited to the United States plus United States US some areas of Canada Mexico Caribbean and the Pacific Alaska Austria Belgium Canada Caribbean Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hawaii Iceland US Europe Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Mexico Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Slovakia Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom United States Indicates partial coverage Navigation Database It is therefore important to also have the latest Navigation Database installed to ensure correct Terrain alerting in the Obstacle Database It is very important to note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and there fore may not be contained in the Obstacle Database CAUTION Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included TERRAIN Alerts TERRAIN alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within the TERRAIN system software algorithms When an alert is issued visual annunciations are displayed Annunciations appear
9. A NOTE During the final approach phase of flight FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is below 200 feet AGL while within 0 5 NM of the ap proach runway or is below 125 feet AGL while within 1 0 NM of the runway Premature Descent Alerting PDA The TERRAIN system issues a Premature Descent Alert PDA when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly below the normal approach path to a runway A PDA ends when the aircraft is either e 0 5 NM from the runway threshold OR e is below an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1 0 NM of the threshold PDA Severity Levels TERRAIN ALERT CAUTION The above annunciation and pop up terrain alert are displayed during a PDA alert 190 00357 00 Rev H 49 2 NAV PAGES Terrain Alerts Height Above Terrain Feet Runway 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 iad Distance From Destination Airport nm Premature Descent Alerting PDA Threshold TERRAIN Failure Alert TERRAIN Not Available Alert The TERRAIN system continually monitors The TERRAIN system requires a 3D GPS several system critical items such as database validity navigation solution along with specific vertical hardware status and GPS status Should the system accuracy minimums Should the navigation solution detect a failure a message is annunciated TERRAIN become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the has tailed database coverage
10. Leg Distance leg which is currently used for navigation guidance DTK Desired Track ETA Est Time ryl ETE Est Time Enrte Copy Flight Plan Invert Flight Plan Delete Flight Plan Select Approach Change the displayed data using the Change Fields option select Arrival Highlight the data field you wish to change and turn the small elas ie as right knob to display available data types 5 Press the small right knob to remove the cursor To restore factory default settings for data fields on the Active Flight Plan Page Activate Leg selects the highlighted flight plan leg as the leg currently in use for navigation guidance even if it isn t the 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed closest leg pi MENU to display the Active Flight Plan To activate a flight plan along a specific leg Page Options window 1 From the Active Flight Plan Page press the 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight small right knob to activate the cursor and Restore Defaults and press ENT turn the large right knob to highlight the Active Flight Plan Options desired destination waypoint The lollowing epee some covered the pre 2 Press MENU select the Activate Leg option ceding pages are available for the active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page Options and e Activate Leg press ENT e Crossfill or Manual GTN Crossfill Copy Flight Plan e Invert Flight Plan 3 A confirmation window ap
11. 1 COM GNS 530W only To display the entire list of frequencies for a nearby airport and select from that list 1 26 Start with the desired airport highlighted on the Nearest Airport Page as described on the previous page then press ENT Press the small right knob to remove the cursor and turn the small right knob to dis play the trequency list From the Nearest Airport Page select the desired airport to show a more detailed list ing of frequencies for that airport Press the small right knob momentarily to reactivate the cursor and turn the large right knob to highlight the desired frequency Press ENT to place the highlighted frequency in the standby COM window field Before leaving the frequency page use the large right knob to highlight Done and press ENT Done always needs to be acknowledged before leaving a page group To select a COM frequency for a nearby flight service station FSS or center ARTCC 1 190 00357 00 Rev H Select the Nearest Center or Flight Service Page trom the NRST page group Turn the large right knob until the NRST pages appear Then if necessary turn the small right knob to display the desired NRST page HEAREST ARTCC Use the nearest ARTCC Page to quickly re trieve the frequency s for the nearest center ARTCC facility Press the small right knob momentarily to place the cursor on the page Turn the large right knob to highlight the F
12. By default the identi fiers are enabled Special use and controlled airspace boundaries appear on the map showing the individual sectors in the case of Class B Class C or Class D airspace The following symbols are used to depict the various airports and navaids on the Map Page i Airport with hard surface runway s Primary runway shown Airport with soft surface runway s only Private Airfield Intersection VOR VORTAC VOR DME TACAN DME NDB Localizer Locator Outer Marker 2A 7 eo guga SO Heliport Map Range The map display can be set to 23 different range settings from 500 feet to 2000 nautical miles statute and metric units are also available The range is indi cated in the lower left hand corner of the map display and represents the top to bottom distance covered by the map display NOTE If the 500W series unit is unable to determine The map range appears in the lower left corner Use the RNG key to select the desired map range To select a map range 1 Press the up arrow side of the RNG key to zoom out to a larger map area 2 Press the down arrow side of the RNG key to zoom in to a smaller map area and more detail Map Page Auto Zoom An autozoom feature is available which auto matically adjusts from an en route range of 200 NM through each lower range stopping at a range of 1 0 NM as you approach your destination waypoint The autozoom feature is turned on off trom the map setup pa
13. Garmin dealer for assistance VLOC transfer key stuck GNS 530W only The VLOC flip flop key is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the VLOC flip flop key again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact your Garmin dealer for assistance Waypoint already exists The name you have entered for a user waypoint already exists in memory Waypoint s have been replaced One or more user way points were updated during a unit to unit crossfill operation 190 00357 00 Rev H 205 12 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS Waypoint memory is full You have used all 1000 user waypoint locations in the 500W series unit memory Delete unwanted waypoints to make room for new entries Turn Advisory and Arrival Annunciations The following annunciator messages may appear in the lower right corner of the 500W series unit display Arriving at waypoint Arriving at the destination way point for the active leg Hold direct Direct holding pattern entry Hold parallel Parallel holding pattern entry Hold teardrop Teardrop holding pattern entry Left to xxx in xx sec Turn advisory Turn to the indi cated heading by the time shown Left to xxx now Turn advisory Turn to the indicated heading by the time shown Next DTK xxx in xx sec Waypoint alert Prepare to turn to the indicated heading upon waypoint passage PTK end in xx sec
14. INVER LENGE Pal vcscoscstecniusseaspnceaesnapencareansren uations 72 Delete Fligit Placen 72 select Appraise a E el 72 SEIECUATII Vl sccsvesiacesesbirarsess vanadate gckaresn stints 73 select Deponun 14 Remove Approach Arrival or Departure 14 Closest Point ot FPlirinomiaciinnnamneonaai 15 Parallel TaK eannan 15 Change Fields serami en EEO 11 Restore DO TAUILS sc ccanssearcurarcnstsiaeraeraiaitetnretne ty 77 SNOMCUUS sino n T 77 yi 190 00357 00 Rev H Flight Plan Transfer Feature optional with software V 320 OF laten ent 80 Section 5 Procedures Approaches Departures Con ne 83 Approaches with Procedure Turns ccccccee 86 Flying the Procedure Tut 0 c cccccccseesceeeeeeen 8 Flying the Missed Approach cccccceecen 91 Flying an Approach with a Hold 0 0 0 92 Flying a DME Arc Approach cccc cece 96 Vectors to Final i s cessccssissapisicanSearaieceennrinense 99 Flying the Vectors Approach ccccceeeeeees 100 Course From Fix Flight Plan Legs 00 0 0005 102 ILS Approaches 0 0 0 cccccccsscesssesseesssessessessesneesees 107 Selecting an ILS APProach csssessessesssssesssesseesen 108 Flying the ILS Approach scessessessecsecsesssesseeseessen 109 Selecting an LPV Approach 0 c ccccccseeeees 113 Flying the LPV ADDON sssccrsacsteccoscceesaantecsasecence 113 Flying the LP Approach 0 0 ccs
15. NAV COM PAG C i sscaschsssvascessaascsstoverssnmvrecnssnvorssnnnrasstannenia 15 OPera TING CMETd samernes nnomina 43 Direct To Navigation 0 cccccscscestesseesteeseeseen 16 L ING ta OS a 43 IFR Procedures 35 sssssseccnasvicnat snasisnonsiennsonddasonsannbssanasoen 17 TERRAIN ATERAINO sepistmatsanssivnal bieiansatuvanhonndesssinaniviany 43 Nearest PAGES sig ci chiye date ncccloipstiedesnacdcapncerbanscadbeiececy 18 Baro Corrected AItitUde c scssssssessessessssssesssesseesean 44 Nearest Airport Page ss aascatoveccssamvancasonemesamaecasiennisn 19 Terran Ra Eeoa 44 Nearest Airspace PAQG spucaissivaids ianasicqusvnseasvauardecnamnaceras 20 IDG MOU ccscstasvarcenesrarcoyasecietnasaasenesraneaceysaneeneaes 45 Fight PLANS oecon 21 Tera SYMON 46 Section 1 COM Communicating using the si ma eee OU ee at database UPCates cccscecsessessseesessessesssesneessssessean 47 GNS 530W osname 23 Terrain Obstacle Database Areas of Coverage 48 VOLUME eseseserctstseneetctntntntneeietanannnneieneiain 23 Mavic Oty Database aana heaters tc sceerescs 48 A e seen P aarey 23 TERRAIN Alerts 00ssuunnnnunnnnsssnnnen 48 COM Window and TUNING ees cece ees tees ees teeseeseean 24 POP UP Alerts ln 48 AUtO TUMIIG orssrsstssteseesetnetnetststatineineineineten 2 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance 49 Emergency Channel crorcrsesrscsenenennnnenenenie 28 Premature Descent Alerting PDA sasise 49 STUCK MICFOPMONG aati e
16. Parallel Offset is terminating Right to xxx in xx sec Turn advisory Turn to the indi cated heading by the time shown Right to xxx now Turn advisory Turn to the indicated heading by the time shown Flight Plan Transfer Messages Flight plan imported successfully The Flight Plan file contained Route Points that is it didn t contain only User Waypoints and there were no errors when import ing them to the target position within the units Flight Plan Catalog Waypoint import successful No stored FPL data was modified The Flight Plan file contained one or more User Waypoints and there were no errors when adding them to the User Database Flight plan import failed The unit failed to load any information from the Flight Plan file Neither the Flight Plan Catalog nor the User Database was modified File contains waypoints only The Flight Plan file did not contain any Route Points but one or more User Waypoints were imported successfully FPL import message s The Flight Plan file con tained Route Points it didn t contain only Waypoints and there were some errors or warnings see below Some or all information was imported successfully FPL too long truncated appended to the import results text The Flight Plan file contained more Route Points than a flight plan can support Invalid FPL wpt s locked appended to the import results text The Flight Plan file contained one o
17. Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan and press ENT 4 Turn the large right knob to select the waypoint you wish to delete and press CLR to display a REMOVE WAYPOINT confirmation window 1 Remove IOW Yos E gam Ti 2 2 Highlight the waypoint you wish to delete 4 and press CLR to display the REMOVE WAYPOINT confirmation window 5 With Yes highlighted press ENT to remove the waypoint 6 Once all changes have been made press the small right knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog A one line user comment may be added to any flight plan and is displayed on the Flight Plan Catalog next to the flight plan number By default as the flight plan is being created the comment shows the first and last waypoints in the flight plan 66 190 00357 00 Rev H The comment line at the top of the page can be edited to change the name comment assigned to the flight plan From the Flight Plan Catalog press the small right knob to activate the cursor Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan and press ENT Turn the large right knob to select the com ment line at the top of the screen Use the small and large right knobs to enter the new comment Press ENT when finished Once all changes have been made press the small right knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Flight Plan Catalog Options The followi
18. The Database Versions Page displays the current The Setup 1 Page provides access to airspace Jeppesen database type effective date and expiration alarms CDI scale adjustments an arrival alarm units date along with the version and type of built in land of measure settings position formats map datums database settings for local or UTC time display display adjust ments nearest airport search parameters data held configurations and COM transceiver channel spacing When an item is selected the corresponding page appears providing access to the various unit settings To select highlight with cursor and press ENT Database Versions Third Page Terrain Database Versions in AUX Group The Terrain Database Versions Page displays the To select an item from the Setup Page current terrain and obstacle database types version 1 Press the small right knob momentarily to cycle effective date and expiration date activate the flashing cursor SETUP 1 From the Setup Page highlight the desired item and press ENT Terrain Database Versions 190 00357 00 Rev H 183 9 AUX PAGES 184 Setup 1 Page 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired item and press ENT CDI Alarms Page If a lower CDI scale setting is selected i e 1 0 or to display the corresponding page e g 0 3 NM the higher scale settings are not selected paps EOS MON rade during ANY phase of flight For example if 1 0 NM is select
19. and ENT again to activate the direct to func tion Selecting a Direct To Waypoint from the Ac tive Flight Plan If you re navigating an active flight plan any way point contained in the flight plan may be selected as a direct to waypoint from the Select Direct to Waypoint page see Section 4 for more information on flight plans SELECT HAYPOIHT Activate The flight plan FPL field allows you to select any active flight plan waypoint as your current direct to waypoint To select a direct to waypoint from the active flight plan 1 Press the direct to key The Select Direct to Waypoint Page appears with the waypoint identifier field highlighted 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the flight plan FPL field 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window showing all waypoints in the active flight plan 4 Continue turning the small right knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired waypoint 5 Press ENT to confirm the selected waypoint and ENT again to activate the direct to function NOTE Performing a Direct To to the MAP of an active approach will cancel approach mode 3 DIRECT TO Flight Plan Nearest Waypoints Selecting the Nearest Airport as a Direct To Waypoint The Select Direct to Waypoint Page always displays the nearest airports from your present position on the NRST field Navigating directly to a nearby airport is always just a few simple steps away
20. as your destination using the direct to key or as the last waypoint in a flight plan 2 Press the PROC key and select the VOR 22 approach 3 From the transitions window select VEC TORS APT z 118 708 LOADIWG 117 88 TOP 219 VECTORS 5I KUMGY LEBVY Select VECTORS from the transitions window to activate only the final approach course 190 00357 00 Rev H 99 5 PROCEDURES Vectors To Final Approach 4 Select Load or Activate if already on vectors to final To activate vectors to final from the procedures page 1 Select Billard Muni KTOP as your destination using the direct to key or as the last waypoint in a flight plan 2 Press the PROC key and select the VOR 22 approach 3 From the transitions window select D258G LEBVY as the IAF Also select Load NOTE Since this is not a GPS approach the pilot should be using the VLOC receiver tuned to the correct VOR TOP for navigation GPS guidance is for monitoring only Load approach Yes Rt ants 4 When cleared press the PROC key and select Activate Vectors To Final Press PROC and select Activate Vectors To Final to activate only the final course segment of a loaded approach Flying the Vectors Approach With Vectors To Final VTF selected the CDI needle remains off center until you re established on the final approach course With
21. c cceescsceseseseseeeen 32 Takeoff Tour ccs 1 Default Nav Page Auto ZOOM sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssee 33 Key and KNOB FUNCIONS cossceatossevssennexedororreuenhenn dass 2 Map Pag scndi eee eee 33 Left hand Keys and KNOBS cssesssssssssssssessesssesssesseesees 2 Man SDO sinsnede E 34 Right hand Keys and KnODS scssesesssessecsessesseesneesees 3 Map RANG Cs ccranosssconctanancunamsmanccnansneamans 34 DOUOMMINOWE OVS Daa orsa a r 4 Map rage AWO ZOOM onena a E E 34 Power OM icini n 5 VAD PAINTING zorsan E 35 Powering up the 500W series units csscesseseesseeseeeeees D Wat Drea TO i tient capiiaocnadiiiamack 36 Instrument Panel Self Test 0 0 cece 6 Airspace Information on the Map scssesseseseeseeren 36 Fuel On Board and ChecKlists 0 ccccccseseseeen Mao Pate OMON na nt euyanetrtea ee ceruaat 38 Acquiring Satellites Messag s 0 cccceeeees 8 Wa SeUU E AE ET 39 Selecting Com Nav Frequencies 0cccccceces 9 Distance Measurements scessessecsessesssesseeseesesseean 40 Page Groups esseessssseereerernnnnierrrrrrreeeeenssennnnnnsssnnnnras 10 Data Fields on the MaD ioscssn aecpssuascorenvansecennsenasouvanases 41 NAV Pages aaia nen 12 Selecting Desired On Screen Data 41 Default NAV Page 0 00000011111irrrrrrenesrrrrerrrerrrnn 13 Restoring Factory Settings varniiaisonrainiisineiia 42 Map Panai at teten sentence 14 Terrain Operation ccc sess 43
22. est Airport Page by highlighting the identifier of the desired airport and pressing ENT To view additional information for a nearby airport 1 Select the Nearest Airport Page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the Cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the identifier of the desired airport Highlight the identifier of the desired airport and press ENT to display the database information beginning with location and fuel 4 Press ENT to display the Airport Location Page for the selected airport 5 To view additional WPT pages for the selected airport including the Airport Runway and Air port Frequency Pages press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor Turn the small right knob to display the additional WPT pages When finished press the small right knob to return the flashing cursor to the screen 7 NRST PAGES Nearest Intersections and NDBs 6 To return to the Nearest Airport Page verity that Done is highlighted by the flashing cursor and press ENT or press CLR To display additional database information press the small right knob to remove the cursor then turn the small right knob to select the desired page Nearest Intersection Page The Nearest Intersection Page displays the identi fier symbol bearing and distance to the 25 nearest intersections within 200 NM of your present posi tion To view additional informati
23. lor airports and navaids by simply pressing direct to To select a direct to waypoint from the map page and ENT For pages that display a list of waypoints e g the Nearest Airport Page you must highlight the desired waypoint with the cursor before pressing the direct to key 1 From the Map Page press the small right knob to display a panning pointer 2 Turn the small and large right knobs to place the panning pointer at the desired location When a single waypoint is displayed on screen select it as your direct to waypoint Use the panning pointer to select your way by pressing direct to When a list of way point directly from the map points is displayed press the small right 3 If the panning pointer is placed on an existing knob to display a cursor highlight the iroort navaid or user waypoint the waypoint desired waypoint then press direct to eNO aed yP name is highlighted Press direct to and ENT To select an on screen waypoint as a direct to twice to navigate to the waypoint waypoint 4 Ifthe panning pointer is placed on an open 1 If a single airport navaid or user waypoint is location press direct to and ENT twice to displayed on screen press direct to then press create a MAP waypoint and navigate to ENT twice it 2 lfa list of waypoints is displayed on screen press the small right knob to activate the cursor turn the large right knob to highlight the desired waypoint then press dir
24. over time based on the fuel flow FF figure To view the checklists page 1 Turn the large right knob to highlight Go To Checklists and press ENT 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired checklist then follow the steps in Section 9 Aux Pages Utility Page Checklists to execute each step in the selected checklist 190 00357 00 Rev H TAKEOFF TOUR Fuel On Board and Checklists Set Full Fuel Go To Checklists OK Select Go To Checklists to display the Checklist Page and any available checklists A 500W series unit can hold up to nine check lists with up to 30 entries in each checklist 3 Once you complete the desired checklist s press the small right knob to return to the Checklists Page Press the small right knob again to return to normal operation on the Satellite Status or Map pages Once you ve verified instrument operation with the Instrument Panel Self Test Page displayed turn the large right knob to highlight OK and press the ENT key The Satellite Status Page appears as the 500W series unit begins to collect satellite information An Acquiring status is displayed on the Satellite Status Page and the signal strength of any satellites received appears as bar graph readings This is a good indica tion that you are receiving signals and that a position fix is determined Following the first time use of your 500W series unit the time required for a positi
25. see list below see Section 9 see Section 7 Airport Departure Intersection NDB VOR User Waypoint 190 00357 00 Rev H 121 6 WPT PAGES Finding the Desired Airport Finding the Desired Airport Your 500W series unit uses ICAO identifiers for all airports All U S airport identifiers which contain only letters use the prefix K For example Los Angeles International is KLAX under the ICAO standard Other airports such as Otten Memorial 3VS that contain numbers in the identifier do not require the K prefix Alaska Hawaii and many foreign countries use two letter prefixes If you encounter difficulty when selecting an air port try retrieving the desired airport using the facility name or the city in which it is located After a WPT page is selected information for a waypoint may be viewed by entering the identifier or name of the desired waypoint Enter a waypoint identifier on the top line of any WPT page using the small and large right knobs Once entered the database information for the selected waypoint is displayed To enter a waypoint identifier 1 Select the desired WPT page and press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the small right knob to select the first character of the waypoint s identifier 3 Turn the large right knob to select the next character field 4 Turn the small right knob to select the desired character 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until
26. so you may not mix systems series unit to have the same Jeppesen NavData database cycle number as the GTN unit A NOTE Manual GTN Crossfill requires the 400W 500W A NOTE Crossfill and Manual GTN Crossfill can not be configured to be present at the same time The chosen feature is configured by the installer for your installa tion Manual GTN Crossfill The Manual GTN Crosshll Function allows the GNS 400W 500W series unit to manually send all User waypoints to the connected GTN unit or receive information from a GTN unit Aux Flight Planning Operations To perform fuel planning operations 1 Select Fuel Planning from the Flight Planning Page 2 The current fuel planning leg mode is displayed at the top of the page POINT TO POINT or FPL for a flight plan leg To change the leg mode press MENU to display an options window for the other leg mode then press ENT to accept the other leg mode 190 00357 00 Rev H Flight Plan Change Fields t Restore Defaults For flight plan leg fuel planning select Flight Plan from the options window Use the small right knob to select the desired flight plan and the desired leg of the flight plan 3a For direct to planning verify that the trom waypoint field indicates P POS present position If necessary press CLR to display P POS Press ENT and the flashing cursor moves to the to waypoint field T
27. 00 Rev H 6 WPT PAGES NDBs To display information for an NDB highlight the identifier field Then use the small and large right knobs to enter the NDB s identifier 137 6 WPT PAGES VORs VOR Page The VOR Page displays the facility name city region country magnetic variation latitude and lon gitude for the selected VOR The VOR Page also dis plays the frequency and a weather broadcast indication if applicable There are no options for the VOR page The following descriptions and abbreviations are used zs Identifier and Symbol Facility Name City B a and Region Country cvo Latitude Longitude Position Magnetic Frequency Ninth Page in Variation and Weather WPT Group Broadcast Indication e Symbol See Section 2 Nav Pages Map Page for a graphic illustration of available VOR symbols e VAR Magnetic variation in degrees e Position Latitude Longitude degrees minutes or degrees minutes sec onds MGRS or UTM UPS FREQ Frequency in megahertz MHz e Wx Brdcst Weather information is broadcast on the selected facility s fre quency VORs may be selected by identifier facility name or location city The VOR Page may also be used to quickly tune the VLOC receiver to the selected VOR frequency To display information for a VOR highlight the identifier field Then use the small and large right knobs to enter the VOR s identifier 138 190 00357
28. 032 now when it s time to begin the turn to the outbound course If you haven t already done so press the VLOC flip flop key to activate the ILS frequency If you forget this step the unit displays a reminder message within 2 NM of the FAF to activate the ILS frequency As the distance DIS to the IAF approaches zero the alert is replaced by a turn advisory Left to 032 now Fly the outbound course 030 keeping the needle centered on the external CDI or HSI Once you have flown approximately one minute past SHUTR intersection the alert message Right to 075 in x sec appears in the lower right corner of the screen if you haven t already begun the procedure turn 190 00357 00 Rev H Risht to 075 in 7 sec Right to 075 in 7 sec appears in the lower right corner of the screen to remind you to initiate the procedure turn Turn right to a heading of 075 to initiate the procedure turn Messages displayed during turn provide roll steering guidance The pro cedure turn is displayed on the Map Page and indicated as the active leg on the Default NAV and Active Flight Plan pages The external CDI needle starts moving to the left E FLAGSTAFF DO NOT USE FOR 108 2 FLG NAVIGATION 9 10 GNS 530W only After approximately one minute a message E will appear for turn advisory Left to 255 in x sec to intercept the ILS The GNS 530W sequences to the in
29. 190 00357 00 Rev H 6 WPT PAGES Airport Frequencies Airport Frequency Page To scroll through the frequency list and tune to a The import Frequency Pave displays radio tte desired frequency on the list tuning is only available with the GNS 530W or 530AW quencies and frequency types for the selected airport Identifier Symbol Sean as well as sector and altitude restrictions where and Type applicable If the selected airport has a localizer based approach the localizer trequency s is also listed on eA the Airport Frequency Page The Airport Frequency Frequency Page may be used to quickly select and tune a COM or Agana information is Ja available Third Page in WPT Group 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list placing the cursor on the desired frequency If there are more frequencies in the list than can be displayed on the screen a scroll bar along the right hand side of the screen indicates where you are within the list VLOC frequency Listed communication frequencies include ATIS clearance delivery ground control tower unicom approach and departure The RX next to ATIS identifies it as a receive 3 Press ENT to place the selected frequency only frequency in the standby field of the COM or VLOC window 4 Toremove the flashing cursor press the small right knob Some listed frequencies may include designat
30. 8 33 kHz steps is also provided mitting 118 agp DEPARTURE RX DEPARTURE 118 988 113 68 113 40 a a TX a ee i ete of the Press the COM power volume knob momen ee ane tarily to override the automatic squelch Note the RX receive indication when Volume receiving a station COM radio volume is adjusted using the COM To override the automatic squelch press the power volume knob Turn the COM power volume COM power volume knob momentarily Press COM knob clockwise to increase volume or counterclock power volume knob again to return to automatic wise to decrease volume squelch operation 190 00357 00 Rev H 23 1 COM Com Window and Tuning GNS 530W only COM Window and Tuning Communication frequencies are selected with the tuning cursor in the standby COM frequency field and using the large and small left knobs to dial in the desired frequency The standby frequency always appears below the active frequency The active fre quency is the frequency currently in use for transmit and receive operations ARRIVAL 119 866 115 68 GVE 231 Tuning cursor in the COM window Use the small and large left knobs to dial in the desired standby frequency A frequency may also be quickly selected from the database by simply highlighting the desired frequency on any of the main pages and pressing ENT This pro cess is referred to as auto tuning Once a frequency is selected in the standby field it may be trans
31. Approach confirmation window appears on the screen If you have passed the MAP the 500W series unit proceeds to the transition waypoint without a restart confirmation 84 190 00357 00 Rev H Basic Approach Operations The 500W series provides precision vertical guid ance and non precision advisory guidance using its built in GPS receiver The moving map pages can also be used as a supplemental aid to situational awareness for ILS VOR and NDB approaches and non preci sion localizer based approaches but the appropriate navigational aid MUST be used for primary approach course guidance Approaches designed specifically for GPS are often very simple and don t require overflying a VOR or NDB Currently many non precision approaches have GPS overlays to let you fly an existing procedure VOR VOR DME NDB RNAY etc more accurately using GPS To date there are over 2 400 GPS only approaches and over 2 900 GPS overlay approaches worldwide Many overlay approaches are more complex in comparison to GPS only approaches The 500W series unit displays and guides you through each leg of the approach automatically sequencing through each of these legs up to the missed approach point MAP Approaches may be flown as published with the full transition using any published feeder route or initial approach fix IAF or may be flown with a vectors to final transition Flight mode annunciations are provided in th
32. Departure Page Options The following option is available for the Airport Departure Page by pressing the MENU key Load into Active FPL As described earlier in this section Select Next FPL Apt As described earlier in this section Select Destination Apt As described earlier in this section 190 00357 00 Rev H 135 6 WPT PAGES Intersections To load a departure procedure from the Airport Intersection Page Departure Page The Intersection Page displays the latitude longi tude region and country for the selected intersection The Intersection Page also displays the identifier radial 2 Press MENU to display the Airport Departure and distance from the nearest VOR VORTAC or VOR Page Options DME There are no options for the Intersection page _ The following descriptions and abbreviations are used Nearest VOR and Symbol 1 Select the desired departure runway and transi tion using the steps above Loud into Active FPL o Select Next FPL Apt Identifier and 1 Select Destination Apt Symbol i Region Country Latitude Longitude From the Airport Departure Page press cen MENU to display an options list Load into Active FPL allows you to add the departure mee a Radial and Distance procedure to the beginning of your flight from Nearest VOR plan e Position Latitude Longitude degrees min 3 Press ENT to select the Load into Active FPL utes or degrees minutes seconds option
33. E 28 TERRAIN Failure Alert 50 Remote Frequency Selection Control 28 TERRAIN Not Available Alert 50 NAVCOM Page iuiciceeitoe eoresten cig anaes 52 190 00357 00 Rev H V INTRODUCTION Satellite Status Page ccs eseeseseeseen 54 Dead Reckoning 0 cccccccccsesseseesessessseseeseenen 57 Section 3 Direct To Navigation 0 0 0 59 Selecting a Direct To Waypoint by Facility Name or CODY iaie aie ninth Monnet ok encoun aint 60 Selecting a Direct To Waypoint from the Active Flight Plamena salts Retasteaal 61 Selecting the Nearest Airport as a Direct To Waypoint 61 SOP CUS sonaas A 62 Cancelling Direct To Navigation ccccccse 63 Specifying a Course to a Waypoint 0 000 63 Selecting Direct To a Holding Pattern 64 Section 4 Flight Plans cess 65 Flight Plan Catalog essere 65 Flight Plan Editing ou ceca 65 Flight Plan Catalog Options 0 0 c cece 67 Activating Flight Plans c sccssssecsssessesssecsesseeseeen 67 tiverina Eont E diaaa a 67 Create New Fight Platiisstdssisicavsctavaderavakecvsnisectotbnatsouun 67 E E E E E 68 Comino Fight Plans eseese 68 Deleting Eont Piena aO 69 Delete All Fight Plans uigsuirennsinrarisnaiean 70 Sort List By Number COMMENt ssessesssessseesseessessees 10 Active Flight Plain ccc 10 Active Flight Plan Options 0 00 c cece H PGUIVALC LEO E 11 CTOS enna 11 CODY FIORE PIAN sorso 72
34. Garmin dealer for service 12 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS True north approach Change Mag Var HDG to true The selected approach requires navigation information be referenced to true north In the AUX function change Heading Mode to true User card format unknown A data card has been inserted but the format of the card is not recognized User Magnetic Variation is active Note that User is selected on the AUX Units Mag Var page and the mag netic variation value provided on that page is being used VLOC has failed The GNS 530W has detected a failure in its VLOC receiver The VLOC receiver is not available and the unit should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service VLOC is not responding GNS 530W only Internal system to system communication between the main proces sor and the VLOC receiver has failed Operational status of the VLOC receiver is unknown and the unit should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service VLOC needs service GNS 530W only The unit has detected a failure in its VLOC receiver The VLOC receiver may still be usable but the unit should be returned at your earliest convenience to your Garmin dealer for service VLOC remote transfer key is stuck GNS 530W only The remote VLOC transfer switch is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the switch again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact your
35. In the rare event the GPS integrity cannot meet the non precision HAL limits the unit will send a message to the pilot to abort the approach Abort Approach Loss of Navigation The unit will revert to terminal limits to support navigation to the missed approach when the message is acknowledged LNAV minima and the glideslope indicator M OREGO SALEM MCNARY FIELD SLE DME DME RNP 0 3 NA MALSR For inoperative MALSR increase LPV all cats visibility to RVR 6000 j MISSED APPROACH Climb to 3700 direct Inoperative table does not apply to LNAV VNAV dee ARTTY and hold continue climb in hold For uncompensated Baro VNAV systems LNAV VNAV NA to 3700 below 15 C 5 F or above 48 C 1 20 F SEATTLE CENTER GND CON UNICOM 125 8 291 7 121 9 122 95 A Fly visual to airport 313 3 vA LNAV VNAV only A A1449 800Z AON OZ 9 8002 LOO EZ L MN Procedure NA for arrivals at GLORR via V448 southbound NW 1 23 OCT 2008 to 20 NOV 2008 Procedure INAV only NECIK ae n CUKEV Fly visual to airport 3000 313 3 4 NM 26 NM to INAV VNAV only RW31 y RW31 CATEGORY B LPY DA 570 40 356 400 34 IRA 1335 2 1121 1200 2 1335 3 1121 1200 3 VNAV 940 1 940 13 940 2 1 000 2 MIRL Rwy 16 340 313 to Pa 726 800 2 786 800 214 HIRL Rwy 13 310 RW31 CIRCLING 940 1 726 800 1 SALEM OREGON SALEM MCNARY FIELD SLE pee essnizo
36. NRST Page 0 000000 149 NRST Page Group 149 Navigating to a Nearby Waypoint 000 151 Nearest Airport Page ou ccs 152 Nearest Intersection Page sess 153 Nearest NDB Page 153 Nearest VOR Page 154 Nearest User Waypoint Pag cccccseeees 155 Nearest Center ARTCC Page 0 ccceeees 155 Nearest Flight Service Station FSS Page 156 Nearest Airspace Page ccccccsessssessesseeaneeeees 157 Section 8 VLOC VOR Localizer Glideslope Receiver Operations 00 0 0 161 Ident Audio and Vom 161 VLOC Tuning Window 0 cccc cece 161 VLOC Ident WindoW 0 0 0 ccc eesteeeereen 162 PURO TUNUN Gs ese iotsscas ethic encloses 162 CTO ciiai 164 Section 9 AUX Pages oo 165 AUX Page Group 165 Flight Planning Page ju ccc testes 166 Utility PAS asn 175 CREEKIS TS aisea eldeeetien debe easestateaat 176 TED Ste E E E E E EA 179 RAIM Prediction siscssisnssisoiatateniiniadsnsinkaevcianetsuniotodeynn 180 Software VEPSIONS cssssicaasstecsvcssaideusieasdeuedenideaasasschonss 180 Database Versions csscssessessessesseesneesessesseeaneerees 181 Terrain Database Versions cssessesssessseseesessesseean 181 Setup 1 Page 181 EO E A 185 Units POSION aiios 186 DAE ANG eN 188 Display Backlight csccsssessessesssesssesseesessesseeaneesees 188 Nearest Airport Criteria cssssecsssssssssesssssssessssseseen 189 Data Field COntiQUuration c s
37. Ott To enter an arrival alarm distance use the small and large right knobs to enter the desired alarm distance Press ENT when finished Units Position To set the magnetic variation i 2 190 00357 00 Rev H Select Units Position trom the Setup Page 1 The flashing cursor highlights the heading mode field Turn the small right knob to select the desired heading mode Magnetic True or User If User Heading is selected the flashing cursor will highlight the Heading field Turn the small right knob to the desired heading values hemisphere and then degrees NOTE Manual User selection of the heading value is available for units with SW Version 3 30 or later 9 AUX PAGES Setup 1 Page 4 Press ENT to accept the selection The heading To change the position format modes are described previously in the Units 1 Select Units Position from the Setup Position section Page To change the units of measure 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the 1 Select Units Position from the Setup Position Format field Page 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the position format The following position formats desired units of measure category The fol are available lowing categories and corresponding units of measure are available UHITS POSITIOW Metric km kph Statute mi mph Celsius C Fahrenheit F
38. PAGES Nearest Airspaces Turn the large right knob to select the desired frequency Press ENT to place the frequency on standby Press ENT to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the COM window Press the COM flip flop key to activate the selected frequency To return to the Airspace Information Page turn the large right knob to highlight Done and press ENT or press CLR To return to the Nearest Airspace Page turn the large right knob to highlight Done and press ENT or press CLR Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor 159 7 NRST PAGES Nearest Airspaces The Airspace Information Page displays and air space alert messages are provided for the following airspace types Airspace alert for a military operations area MOA e Alert e Caution e Class B e Class C Class D e CTA Danger e MOA Prohibited Restricted e TMA Training e TRSA Unspecified e Warning The bottom right hand corner of the Airspace Information Page displays the floor and ceiling limits of the airspace The following are examples of what may appear as vertical limits for an airspace Airspace Information Page for the same military operations area 11000ft msl 11000 feet mean sea level e 500ft agl 500 feet above ground level e MSL at mean sea level e NOTAM see Notice to Airmen Unknown Unlimited e See Chart e Surface Not s
39. Selected CDI depending upon sired airspace type then turn the small right the current phase of flight knob to select On or Off 3 Turn the small right knob to select On or off as desired Press ENT to accept the selection 190 00357 00 Rev H 187 9 AUX PAGES Setup 1 Page To change the ILS CDI selection 2 188 NOTE The CDI scale is always displayed in nautical miles regardless of the current distance units of mea sure selected on the Units Position Page Select CDI Alarms from the Setup Page Turn the large right knob to highlight the ILS CDI Capture field Turn the small right knob to select Auto or Manual as desired Press ENT to accept the selection NOTE Installations with certain autopilots such as the KAP 140 and KFC225 do not allow automatic ILS CDI switching Auto Manual Auto ILS CDI Capture switches the CDI output from GPS to the VLOC receiver as you intercept the final approach course To set the arrival alarm and alarm distance Select CDI Alarms from the Setup Page Turn the large right knob to highlight the On Oft field left hand side of the field directly below Arrival Alarm Turn the small right knob to select On or Off as desired Press ENT to accept the selection The flashing cursor moves to the alarm dis tance field to the immediate right of On or
40. The Jeppesen NavData card supplied with your the 500W series unit 500W series unit should be installed or removed only 3 Grasp the swing arm handle between your when the 500W series unit is off Insert the card with thumb and forefinger and pull directly away the swing arm handle on the left and the label facing from the face of the 500W series unit to unseat up see illustration left If the NavData card is not the connector and remove the NavData card present when the unit is turned on you will receive a No Jeppesen Aviation Database Limited to user defined waypoints message on the Database Confir mation Page If the NavData card is removed during operation a Data card removed Unit will restart in 30 seconds warning appears The 500W series unit auto matically reinitializes even if the card is re inserted You may also reinitialize the unit manually by pressing ENT To insert the NavData card 1 Place the card into the NavData card slot with the label facing up and the swing arm handle on the lett NOTE There are two data card slots on the face of the A 500W series unit The Jeppesen NavData card should be inserted in the left most slot The second slot is provided for the TAWS Terrain card 2 Press the NavData card into place until it seats on the internal connector and the front of the card is flush with the face of the 500W series unit 3 Ifthe swing arm handle is up gently lower the handle and
41. activate the holding pattern using the shortcut steps described in Section 4 To activate a specitic leg of the active flight plan As you approach BODRY intersection trom within the holding pattern a waypoint alert Next DTK 209 appears in the lower right corner of the screen When within 45 of the final approach course and the FAF is the TO waypoint the 500W series unit switches from terminal mode to approach mode CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 NM full scale deflection to either 0 3 NM or 2 full scale deflection whichever is less at the FAF The change occurs over 2 NM and is completed by the FAF As you approach the FAF a waypoint alert in the lower right corner Next DTK 210 in x sec appears Make any course adjustments necessary for the final course segment FAF to MAP As you approach the FAF the Next DTK 210 in x sec waypoint alert appears in the lower right corner of the screen 13 As you cross the FAF the destination sequences 14 to the MAP RW21 the runway threshold With the needle centered tly toward the MAP observing the altitude minimums dictated by the approach plate DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION NOTE When viewing the Map Page you ll note that the final course segment is displayed in ma genta the active leg of the flight plan always appears in magenta and a dashed line extends the course beyond the MAP Do NOT follow this extended course Instea
42. activate the new flight plan 1 On the Flight Plan Catalog page press the small right knob to activate the cursor Rotate the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan 2 Press the MENU key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Options 3 Turn the small right knob to select Activate Flight Plan and press ENT Activate Flight Plan Copy Flight Plan Invert Flight Plan Delete Flight Plan Select Approach Select Arrival Select Departure Select Activate Flight Plan from the page menu to begin using the new flight plan ZZ 190 00357 00 Rev H 1 COM GNS 530W only Radio Volume Auto Squelch Section 1 COM Squelch Communicating using the The COM radio features an automatic squelch to GNS 530W reject many localized noise sources You may override the squelch function by pressing the COM power The GNS 530W features a digitally tuned VHF volume knob This facilitates listening to a distant sta COM radio that provides a seamless transition from tion or setting the desired volume level communication to navigation The GNS 530W s While receiving a station an RX indication COM radio operates in the aviation voice band from appears in the upper right corner of the COM 118 000 to 136 975 MHz in 25 kHz steps default window to the immediate right of COM A TX For European operations a COM radio configuration indication appears at this location while you are trans of
43. active frequency in either window cannot be ealune Laos a accessed directly only the standby frequency is highlighted by the tuning cursor ident is enabled an ID cla indication appears in the Qo Push for ident audio Turn to adjust upper right corner of the re VLOC window to the immediate right of VLOC Push to toggle tuning cursor between COM and VLOC windows Turn to ad just the kHz value the portion after VLOC audio volume is adjusted using the VLOC the decimal point of the standby volume knob Turn the VLOC frequency VLOC volume knob clock wise to increase volume Turn to adjust the MHz value the or counterclockwise to J l portion before the decimal point of Di anapT the standby VLOC frequency 190 00357 00 Rev H 161 8 VLOC RECEIVER VLOC Ident Window GNS 530W only To select a VOR localizer ILS frequency VLOC Ident Window 1 Ifthe tuning cursor is not currently in the VLOC Directly below the VLOC Tuning window press the small left knob momen Window is a VLOC Ident Window tarily default setting When the GNS 530W is tuned to a nearby VOR the VLOC Ident Window displays the Morse code identifier of the selected station the radial from the VOR and the distance from the VOR When tuned to a nearby localizer the VLOC Ident window displays the identifier associated airport and runway The VLOC Ident Window can be replaced with traffic information or configurable data fields
44. airspace alerts are based on three dimensional data latitude longitude and altitude to avoid nuisance alerts The alert boundaries for con 190 00357 00 Rev H 157 7 NRST PAGES Nearest Airspaces To view additional details for an airspace listed trolled airspace are also sectorized to provide complete on the Nearest Airspace Page information on any nearby airspace Once one of the described conditions exists the message annunciator 1 Select the Nearest Airspace Page flashes alerting you of an airspace message if airspace alert messages are enabled See Sec 9 Aux Setup 1 CDI Alarms for more information To view an airspace alert message 1 When the message annunciator above the MSG key flashes press MSG Press MSG to view an airspace alert message Press MSG again to remove the message window and return to the previous page 2 Press MSG again to return to the previous page Once you have been provided an airspace alert message detailed information concerning the specific airspace is provided on the Nearest Airspace Page The Nearest Airspace Page displays the airspace name status Ahead Ahead lt 2nm etc as described on the previous page and a time to entry if applicable By selecting any airspace name listed on the Nearest Airspace Page additional details are provided including controlling agency communication frequen cies and floor ceiling limits 158 190 00
45. altitude data is being received from RS 232 Serializer Icarus Rosetta or Shadin or grey code inputs If the problem persists contact your Garmin dealer and check the installation and installa tion settings No basemap data available The 500W series unit has detected a failure in the built in basemap land data memory Land data does not appear on the Map Page Other unit functions continue to work normally however the 500W series unit should be taken to your Garmin dealer for service at your earliest convenience NON WGS84 WPT Do not use GPS for nav to xxxxx The position of the selected waypoint xxxxx is not calculated based on the WGS84 map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed Do not use GPS to navigate to the selected non WGS84 waypoint Non WGS84 wpt navigation xxxxx The position of the selected waypoint xxxxx is not calculated based on the WGS84 map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed Do not use GPS to navigate to the selected non WGS84 waypoint Not receiving input data on 429 Channel 1 or 2 No data has been received on the ARINC 429 channel connection for a period exceeding five seconds If the problem persists the installation should be checked by your Garmin dealer Not receiving input data on 232 Channel 1 through 5 No data has been received on one or more of the RS 232 channel connections for a period exceeding ten seconds If the pro
46. and press your flight plan by cancelling the direct to ing ENT To select a nearby airport as a direct to destina To view additional information for a nearby mon airport From the Nearest Airport Page 1 Press the small right knob to activate the 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired airport trom the list airport trom the list 3 Press ENT to display waypoint WPT informa 3 Press the direct to key ENT and ENT again tion pages for the selected airport to navigate to the nearby airport SELECT HAYPOIHT Activate Additional information for a nearby airport is To select a nearby airport as a new destina available by highlighting an identifier on the tion highlight its identifier press the direct list and pressing ENT to key ENT and ENT again 4 To display runway and frequency informa From an Airport Information Page tion press the small right knob to remove 1 Press the direct to key ENT and ENT again the cursor and turn the small right knob to to navigate to the nearby airport display the desired information page 190 00357 00 Rev H 19 TAKEOFF TOUR Nearest Airspace Nearest Airspace Page The last page in the NRST group the Nearest Airspace Page provides information for up to nine controlled or special use airspaces near or in your flight path Airspace information appe
47. authorized govern ment charts not replace them Land and water data is provided only as a general reference to your surround ings The positional accuracy of the land and water data is not of a precision suitable for use in navigation and it should not be used for navigation Only official government charts and notices contain all information needed for safe navigation and as always the user is responsible for their prudent use Desired Present Map Di ap Display Track Position Data Fields A Second Page in NAV Group The Map Page is the second of the Nav pages six or more if equipped with weather traffic radar or other systems The map range is depicted in the lower left corner and adjusted with the RNG key Map Range Five user selectable data fields can be added to the right hand side of the Map Page By default the displayed data is destination waypoint name WPT desired track DTK ground track TRK distance to destination waypoint DIS and ground speed GS Adding these data fields or changing the data types is outlined later in this section 190 00357 00 Rev H 33 2 NAV PAGES Map Page a GPS position the present position airplane symbol will appear on the Map Page in yellow No symbol will be present when there is no active flight plan Map Symbols Various symbols are used to distinguish between waypoint types The identifiers for any on screen waypoints can also be displayed
48. can use direct point to point vate function field is highlighted navigation to guide you from takeoff to touchdown SELECT HAYPOINT even in the IFR environment Once a destination is selected the unit provides course and distance data based upon a direct course from your present position to your destination A destination can be selected from any page with the direct to key Destination Waypoint Identifier Field SELECT gt HAVPOINT Confirm the selected direct to destination by highlighting Activate and pressing ENT 6 Press ENT to activate a direct to course to the Activate selected destination Press and hold CLR to Function Field return to the default NAV page Select Direct To Waypoint Page To select a direct to destination 1 Press the direct to key The Select Direct to Waypoint Page appears with the destination field highlighted The direct to waypoint may also be selected by facility or city name See Section 3 for more information 2 Turn the small right knob to enter the first letter of the destination waypoint identifier The destination waypoint may be an airport VOR NDB intersection or user waypoint as long as it is in the database or stored in memory as a user waypoint 3 Turn the large right knob to the right to move the cursor to the next character position 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to spell out the rest of the waypoint identitier 16 190 00357 00 Rev H IFR Proced
49. data field of navigation data e g ground speed track distance to destination etc Traffic Watch if your 500W series unit is connected to other equipment providing traf fic alert information e g L3 SKYWATCH or RYAN TCAD a window is provided to 190 00357 00 Rev H 191 9 AUX PAGES Setup 2 Page display traffic information This allows you to monitor traffic conditions from ANY page and quickly identify traffic hazards See the 400W 500W Series Display Interfaces Pilot s Guide Addendum for more information on traffic data 3 Press ENT to accept the selection 4 If Configurable Data Fields is selected a second selection field appears to allow you to select the desired data type Turn the large right knob to highlight this second field then turn the small right knob to display a list of available navigation data types Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired data type and press ENT to approve your selection DIS Distance DTK Desired Track ESA Enrte Safe Alt ETA Est Time Aryl ETE Est Time Enrte GS Ground Speed MSA Min Safe Alt TKE Track Ang Err TRK Track VSR Vert Spd Reqd COM Configuration To set the COM channel spacing 1 Select COM Configuration from the Setup 1 Page 2 The flashing cursor highlights the channel spac ing field Turn the small right knob to select the desired channel spacing 8 33 kHz or 25 0 kHz Press ENT wh
50. date and time are cal 190 00357 00 Rev H 185 186 9 AUX PAGES Setup 1 Page culated directly from the GPS satellites signals and cannot be changed If you prefer to use local time simply designate the offset by adding or subtracting the correct number of hours Not all time zones are offset from UTC by a whole number of hours e g Newfoundland Central Australia India Iraq Local 12 hour Local 24 hour UTC The Date Time Page allows you to display time information such as ETA in UTC zulu or local time Display Backlight allows you to adjust the display for optimum viewing in any condition Automatic backlighting is available which uses a built in photocell at the top right corner of the dis play bezel to make the proper display adjustments without any user intervention You may select manual control of the display backlighting to tailor the 500W series unit display to your needs A saved when the 500W series unit is turned off Backlighting reverts to the Auto setting the next time the unit is turned on Nearest Airport Criteria defines the minimum runway length and surtace type used when deter mining the 25 nearest airports to display on the Nearest Airport Page A minimum runway length and or surface type may be entered to prevent NOTE Display backlighting changes are not airports with small runways or runways that are not of appropriate surface from being displ
51. during the selection process see Sec 6 WPT Pages Duplicate waypoints for more information Identifier Symbol Flight Plan and Region ield Facility Name City Nearest Airport Activote Field To select a direct to waypoint by facility name or city 1 Press the direct to key The Select Direct to 4 Waypoint Page appears with the waypoint identifier field highlighted SELECT P HAYPOIHT Activate Select the third line on the Select Direct to Waypoint Page to choose your direct to way point airport VOR NDB by city name 60 190 00357 00 Rev H Turn the large right knob to highlight the facility name second line see above or the city third line see above field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the facility name or city location of the desired direct to waypoint As you spell the facility name or city the Spell N Find feature selects the first entry in the database based upon the characters you have entered up to that point SELECT HAYPOIHWT Activate Use the small and large right knobs to enter the city name Continue turning the small right knob to view any additional listings for the selected city Continue turning the small right knob to scroll through any additional database listings for the selected facility name or city If you scroll past the desired waypoint you can also scroll backwards with the small right knob Press ENT to confirm the selected waypoint
52. feet full scale deflection dure data and to provide navigation along these legs 9 As you approach the MAP a waypoint alert Palmdale CA AF Plant 42 Arriving at waypoint appears in the lower i VOR DME or GPS Rwy 25 right corner 10 As you cross the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS key indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is sus pended at the MAP A from indication is silts vo gar Aas displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION but course guidance along the final approach course continues Do NOT follow this extended There are three different types of course from fix legs course Follow published missed approach TYPE 1 Course from fix to distance or Course procedures using the OBS key to initiate the from fix to DME distance missed approach sequence Course from fix to distance legs appears in the flight plan like normal waypoints but the destination name always begins with a D followed by a distance in tenths of nautical miles from the waypoint fix This example uses the VOR DME RWY 25 approach into Palmdale California KPMD and includes a teardrop course reversal 1 As you reach the initial approach fix PMD a a waypoint alert Right to 072 in x sec As you cross the MAP cySp apnea snag appears in the lower right corner of the screen the OBS key indicating that the automatic As the distance to the IAF approaches zero the wayp
53. first waypoint of 119 800 z an arrival procedure the 500W series unit switches from en route mode to terminal mode as indicated in the lower left corner of 115 68 ILS 64 the screen The switch to terminal mode is SVE ye a accompanied by a gradual Course Deviation 722 Indicator CDI scale transition from 2 0 to i 1 0 NM full scale deflection Press PROC highlight Select Approach and press ENT From the pop up window select the VOR 04 approach into KLYH 190 00357 00 Rev H 8 88 5 PROCEDURES Procedure Turn Approach USE FOR NAVIGATION Several miles prior to reaching the IAF LYH you may wish to review the approach sequence Press the FPL key to display the Active Flight Plan Page Press the small right knob and turn the large right knob to review each segment of the approach When finished press FPL again to return to the previous page As you approach the IAF LYH a waypoint alert Next DTK 205 in x sec appears in the lower right corner of the screen As the distance DIS to the IAF approaches zero the alert is replaced by a turn advisory Left to 205 in x sec Dial the outbound course of 205 into the CDI or HSI using the OBS knob and initiate a standard rate turn to this course heading 190 00357 00 Rev H As you approach the IAF the Left to 209 in x sec waypoint alert appears in the lower right corner Prepare to turn to this hea
54. in a dedicated field in the lower left corner of the display TERRAIN Annunciation Field PEER hE Pop up Terrain Alert Pop up Alerts On any page except the TERRAIN Page when a terrain or obstacle alert is issued a pop up window is displayed with the appropriate alert To acknowledge the pop up alert and return to the currently viewed page Press the CLR key To acknowledge the pop up alert and quickly display the TERRAIN Page Press the ENT key 48 190 00357 00 Rev H Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance The unit will issue terrain alerts not only when the aircraft altitude is below the terrain elevation but also when the aircraft is projected to come within minimum clearance values of the terrain This alerting called Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance FLTA is also pro vided for obstacles Any potential impact points will be depicted on the display FLTA Severity Levels TERRAIN ALERT PRESS TERRAIN PAGE PRESS PREVIOUS PAGE TERRAIN ADVISORY advisory Similarly an OBSTACLE ADVISORY alert is also provided TERRAIN ALERT PRESS TERRAIN PAGE PRESS PREVIOUS PAGE TERRAIN AHEAD alert flashing Similarly an OBSTACLE AHEAD alert is also provided Phase of Flight Level Flight Descending En Route 700 ft 500 ft Terminal 350 ft 300 ft Approach 150 ft 100 ft Departure 100 ft 100 ft Minimum Terrain Clearance Values 2 NAV PAGES Terrain Alerts
55. in one of the following three conditions 1 the turn requires a bank angle in excess of 25 in order to stay on course 2 the turn requires a course change greater than 175 or 3 during a DME arc approach the turn anticipation distance exceeds 90 seconds Stored data was lost All user waypoints flight plans and system settings have been lost due to a system reset Stormscope device has failed The 500W series unit cannot communicate with the WX 500 and or the WX 500 is reporting a system failure Stormscope heading has failed The WX 500 is reporting invalid heading data The failure may be within the WX 500 or other connected equipment TAWS has failed The 500W series unit has detected a failure in its TAWS system The most likely cause is a miss ing or corrupt Terrain database If the Terrain database is not the cause the unit should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service TAWS inhibit key stuck The external TAWS inhibit key is stuck TAWS mute caution key is stuck The external HTAWS aural suppression input is stuck 204 190 00357 00 Rev H TAWS reduced protection key is stuck The external TAWS reduced protection key is stuck TCAD altitude data invalid If the Ryan TCAD has an altitude failure the TCAD will announce an altitude failure aurally TCAD ALTITUDE DATA INVALID but continue operating The relative altitude for the targets will be invalid TCAD device needs serv
56. is less than 0 5 NM right of the final approach course Once the aircraft is within the approach course and the CDI is active automatic waypoint sequencing resumes and SUSP is removed 5 PROCEDURES Course From Fix Legs if 4 i a F UG Ags H ae T H DAW 7 1 J CESMO As you converge with the final approach course the CDI needle on the Default NAV Page and the external CDI moves toward the center 6 As the CDI needle centers make any remaining course corrections to establish yourself on the final approach course DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION 7 As you approach the FAF a waypoint alert in the lower right corner Next DTK 214 in xx sec appears Make any course adjustments necessary for the final course segment FAF to MAP After the FAF VLOC guidance should be used for this approach LNAV remains annunci ated to indicate on screen CDI sensitivity 190 00357 00 Rev H 101 5 PROCEDURES Course From Fix Legs 8 As you cross the FAF the destination sequences Course From Fix Flight Plan Legs to the MAP RW22 With the needle cen Certain approach departure and arrival procedures tered tly toward the MAP observing the alti in the Jeppesen database contain Course From Fix flight tude minimums dictated by the approach plate plan legs The 500W series unit is able to load these On screen CDI scaling continues to tighten to legs into the flight plan along with the rest of the proce 350
57. knob to activate the Removes all land data except rivers panning target pointer and lakes 2 Turn the small right knob to move up turn Removes all airspace except Prohibit clockwise or down turn counterclockwise ed and Restricted Also removes NDBs 3 Turn the large right knob to move right turn Intersections and User waypoints clockwise or left counterclockwise Removes all data except the Active 4 To cancel the panning function and return to Flight Plan Prohibited airspace rivers your present position press the small right lakes traffic and lightning data also knob equivalent to A approach mode When the target pointer is placed on an object the decluttering name of that object is highlighted even if the name Map Panning wasn t originally displayed on the map This feature applies to airports navaids user created waypoints roads lakes rivers just about everything displayed on the map except route lines Another Map Page function is panning which allows you to move the map beyond its current limits without adjusting the map scale When you select the panning function by pressing the small right When an airport navaid or user waypoint is knob a target pointer flashes on the map display selected on the map display you can review infor A window also appears at the top of the map display mation about the waypoint or designate the waypoint showing the latitude longitude position
58. listing by number or comment 1 Select the Sort List By Number or Sort List By Comment option whichever is currently displayed trom the Flight Plan Catalog Options and press ENT Active Flight Plan The Active Flight Plan Page provides information and editing functions for flight plan 0 the flight plan currently in use for navigation Once you have activated a flight plan the Active Flight Plan Page shows each waypoint for the flight plan along with the desired track DTK distance DIS for each leg and cumulative distance CUM The data fields are user selectable and may be changed to display esti mated time of arrival ETA or estimated time en route ETE The Active Flight Plan Page shows waypoint names and data for the route currently being used for navigation guidance To change a data field on the Active Flight Plan Page 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options window 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Change Fields and press ENT 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the field you wish to change 4 Turn the small right knob to select the desired data item and press ENT 70 190 00357 00 Rev H 4 FLIGHT PLANS Active Flight Plan Options Activate Leg Activate Leg activates reactivates the flight plan and selects the highlighted leg as the active leg the CUM Cumulty Dist DIS
59. mode will continue until GPS posi tion is restored when GPS navigation is restored Dead Reckoning mode is exited The DR annunciations will be removed and GPS information will be used to compute navigation related information for the current flight phase Dead Reckoning is only allowed in En Route and Oceanic flight modes If the unit is in a Terminal or Approach flight mode when Dead Reckoning takes place No GPS Position will be displayed on the map pages and all navigation data will be dashed If you are operating in Dead Reckoning mode and a transition to Terminal or Approach flight modes would occur from the projected Dead Reckoning position Dead Reckon ing mode will be discontinued No GPS Position will be displayed on the map pages and all navigation data will be dashed 190 00357 00 Rev H 57 2 NAV PAGES Blank Page 58 190 00357 00 Rev H Section 3 Direct To Navigation The direct to function provides a quick method of setting a course to a waypoint Once a direct to is activated the unit establishes a point to point course line geodesic path from your present position to the selected direct to waypoint The unit will provide navi gation guidance to the selected direct to waypoint until the direct to is manually cancelled or replaced by a new active leg or direct to To select a direct to waypoint 1 Press the direct to key The Select Direct to Waypoint Page appears with the waypoint id
60. naming convention for an approach you select This example is based upon a flight from Hutchin son Kansas Municipal KHUT to Billard Municipal KTOP in Topeka Kansas The VOR DME runway 22 approach is selected along with D258G LEBVY as the IAF 1 Select Billard Muni KTOP as your destination via the direct to key or as the last waypoint in a flight plan 96 190 00357 00 Rev H SELECT P HAYPOINT Activate Press direct to and select KTOP as your destination using the small and large right knobs Press the PROC key and select the VOR 22 approach From the transitions window select LEBVY as the IAF Then select Load or Activate if already cleared direct to the IAF for the approach APT s vie 117 80 me TOP 246 116r Press PROC and select the VOR 22 ap proach and LEBVY transition using the large right knob and ENT DO NOT USE FOR Pel NAVIGATION Billard Muni Topeka KS VOR Rwy 22 31 nm from airport Within 31 NM of KTOP the 500W series unit switches from en route mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions from 2 0 to 1 0 NM full scale deflection If you haven t already activated the approach in step 2 be sure to do so when cleared for the approach If you ve loaded the approach but not activated it press PROC and select Activate Approach 190 00357 00 Rev H 5 PROCEDURES DME Arc Approac
61. necessary course adjust ments When within 45 of the final approach course past CF25 the 500W series unit switches from terminal mode to approach mode LNAV appears in the lower left corner of the screen replacing TERM CDI scaling will be tightened from 1 0 to 0 3 NM full scale deflection or 2 full scale deflection which ever is less at the FAF and as detined for the approach The change occurs over 2 NM and is completed by the FAF As you approach the FAF Next DTK 265 in x sec appears in the lower right corner of the screen As you cross the FAF the destination sequences to the MAP MA25 With the CDI needle centered tly toward the MAP observing the altitude minimums dictated by the approach plate As you approach the MAP a waypoint alert Arriving at waypoint appears in the lower right corner of the screen CDI scaling continues 103 5 PROCEDURES Course From Fix Legs to tighten trom 0 3 NM to 350 feet full scale p MISSED APPROACH deflection Palmdale CA USAF Plant 42 9 As you cross the MAP SUSP appears N VOR DME or GPS Rwy 25 above the OBS key indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is sus pended at the MAP If a missed approach is required use the OBS key to initiate the missed approach sequence as outlined below MISSED APPROACH Climb to 5000 outbound via PMD VOR R 282 then climbing RIGHT turn to 7000 direct PMD VOR
62. of the pointer as your direct to destination plus the bearing and distance to the pointer from your present position 190 00357 00 Rev H 35 2 NAV PAGES VETOED tal C0 To review information for an on screen airport navaid or user waypoint 1 Use the panning function as described on the previous page to place the target pointer on a waypoint 2 Press ENT to display the waypoint information page s for the selected waypoint 3 Press CLR to exit the information page s Map Direct To To designate an on screen airport navaid or user waypoint as your direct to destination 1 Use the panning function see previous page to place the target pointer on a waypoint 2 Press the direct to key The Select Direct to Waypoint Page appears with the selected waypoint already listed 3 Press ENT twice to confirm the selection and begin navigating to the waypoint The direct to function can be used anywhere on the map If nothing currently exists at the crosshair position a new waypoint called MAP is created at the target pointer location before the direct to is initiated SELECT P HAYPOINT Activate Use the panning function and direct to key to select a destination waypoint directly from the map MAP is created as a waypoint if nothing exists at the pointer s location Airspace Information on the Map When a special use or controlled airspace bound ary appears on the map display you ca
63. outbound leg and a procedure turn Of course vectors to final could also be selected as previously described for the non precision approach examples Flagstaff AZ Pulliam ILS DME Rwy 21 r ILS 210 110 5 IFLG m FLAGSTAFF 108 2 FLG DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION 1 Select Flagstaff Pulliam KFLG as your des tination via the direct to key or as the last waypoint in a flight plan 2 Press the PROC key and select the ILS 21 approach 108 190 00357 00 Rev H Once the destination airport is selected us ing direct to or an active flight plan press PROC and choose the Select Approach option 3 From the transitions window select SHUTR as the IAF Also select Load or Activate if already cleared for the approach 124 566 110 58 IFLG KFLG VECTORS ILS 21 FRISY SHUT R m FLG Once the approach is selected by name a pop up window asks you to select the ap propriate transition SHUTR intersection in this example 4 A reminder message appears indicating that GPS can only be used for approach monitoring As mentioned previously you need to use the VLOC receiver for this approach Press ENT to acknowledge the message When you Load or Activate an ILS approach the ILS frequency is automatically placed in the standby field of the VLOC window To use this frequency 5 PROCEDURES GNS 530W only ILS Approach
64. provide Temporary Flight Restriction TFR information Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control To obtain accessories for your 500W series please contact your Garmin dealer Help us better support you by completing our on line registration form today Registration ensures that you will be notified of product updates and new products and provides lost or stolen unit tracking Please have the serial number of your unit handy connect to our web site www garmin com and look for our Product Registration link on the home page The 500W series display lenses are coated with a special anti reflective coating which is very sensitive to skin oils waxes and abrasive cleaners It is very important to clean the lens using an eyeglass lens cleaner which is specified as safe for anti reflective coatings and a clean lint free cloth AC 90 100 Statement of Compliance The Garmin 400W navigational unit meets the performance and functional requirements of AC 90 100A i 190 00357 00 Rev H Accessories and Packing List Congratulations on choosing the world s finest panel mounted IFR navigation communication system The 500W series represents Garmin s continued com mitment to providing you with the most advanced technology available today in an accurate easy to use design suitable for all of your flying needs the term 500W series applies to the GPS 500W GNS 5
65. simply press the VLOC flip flop key to place it in the active frequency field Flying the ILS Approach When you Activate an ILS approach automatic switching of the external CDI is enabled unless turned off from the CDI Alarms Page When you are established on the inbound course to the FAF and within 45 the external CDI guidance automatically switches from GPS shown in green text to VLOC shown in white text If you have forgotten to activate the ILS frequency step 4 below automatic selection of VLOC does not occur ILS 210 110 5 IFLG Loc Crs offset 1 Rwy centerline 209 DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION 1 Within 31 NM of KFLG the unit switches from en route mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions from 2 0 to 1 0 NM full scale deflection 2 Ifyou haven t already activated the approach in the steps on the previous page be sure 190 00357 00 Rev H 109 ILS Approach 5 PROCEDURES GNS 530W only to do so when cleared for the approach See Approaches with Procedure Turns in this section step 4 for a description of this opera tion As you approach the IAF SHUTR a waypoint alert Lett to 032 in x sec appears in the lower right corner of the screen 134 556 hs 110 50 N Q IFLG KFLG ILS 21 10 7580 Left to 832 in 8 sec As you approach the IAF Left to 032 in x sec appears followed by Left to
66. specify significantly better satellite cover age than other flight phases RAIM may not be avail able when flying some approaches The 500W series unit automatically monitors RAIM during approach operations and warns you if RAIM is not available In such cases use the GNS 530W s VLOC receiver instead for the approaches RAIM prediction helps you plan for a pending flight to confirm GPS operation during an approach RAIM prediction only predicts the availability of Fault Detection FD integrity in the absence of WAAS corrections It cannot predict the availability of LPV or L VNAV approaches The FAA provides a NOTAM service for LPV approach availability ag An INTEG annunciation at the bottom left corner of the screen indicates that satellite coverage is insufficient to pass built in receiver autonomous integrity monitoring RAIM tests When this occurs the GPS receiver continues to provide navigation information but should not be used for primary navigation guidance Use the GNS 530W s VLOC receiver or another suitable navigation source Software Versions provides software version information for the operating software within the GPS receiver COM transceiver VOR localizer receiver glideslope receiver and main processor board Database Versions The Database Versions Page displays the current Jeppesen database type effective date and expiration date along with the version and type of built in land databas
67. the CDI key Arriving at waypoint As you approach the MAP Arriving at waypoint appears in the lower right corner of the screen 15 As you cross the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS key indicating that auto matic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP A FROM indication 112 190 00357 00 Rev H Selecting an LPV Approach For this example we ll use a flight from Eugene Oregon KEUG to Salem Oregon KSLE and select the RNAV runway 31 approach GLORR intersec tion is selected as the IAF Of course vectors to final could also be selected as previously described for the non precision approach examples An approach plate is shown on the following page 1 With Salem KSLE as your destination in your flight plan press the PROC key and select the RNAV 31 Z GPS approach and press ENT From the transitions field select GLORR as the IAF and press ENT APT LOADIHG VECTORS DIYAT OCAYE activate Select Load and press ENT to add the approach to the active flight plan Review and execute the modified flight plan Go direct to GLORR when cleared Direct GLORR for the approach 5 PROCEDURES LPV Approach Flying the LPV Approach 1 190 00357 00 Rev H Within 31 NM of KSLE the GNS 500W Series unit switches from en route mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions from 2 0 to 1 0 NM full scale deflection As you
68. the approach acti vated the Map Page displays an extension of the final approach course in magenta remember magenta is used to depict the active leg of the flight plan and VTF appears as part of the active leg on the Default NAV Page as a reminder that the approach was activated with vectors to final In this example we ll assume ATC vectors result in a rectangular course to intercept final as follows DO NOT USE FOR gy NAVIGATION ro RW22 1 When VTF is activated the 500W series unit switches to approach mode and course guid ance is given along the final approach course CDI full scale deflection is as shown in Appen dix C 100 190 00357 00 Rev H The unit suspends automatic waypoint sequencing in this case because VTF was activated while on the From side of the Final Approach Fix If the approach is loaded but not yet activated press PROC and select Activate Vectors To Final ATC instructs you to turn left to a heading of 025 This places you parallel to the final approach course in the opposite direction CDI needle deflection is to the left ATC instructs you to turn right to a heading of 115 ATC instructs you to turn right to a heading of 175 to intercept the final approach course As you converge with the final approach course the needle moves toward the center In the following illustration the needle has returned to the on screen CDI and your current position
69. the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited Information in this document is subject to change without notice Garmin reserves the right to change or improve their products and to make changes in the content of this material without obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes or improvements September 2012 190 00357 00 Rev H Introduction Warnings Cautions and Notes WARNING VNAV is to be used for advisory purposes WARNING The altitude calculated by the 500W series is geometric height above mean sea level and could vary significantly from altitude displayed by pressure altimeters in aircraft WARNING The Jeppesen database incorporated in the 500W series must be updated regularly in order to ensure that its information is current Updates are released every 28 days A database information packet is included in your 500W series package Pilots using an out of date database do so entirely at their own risk only VNAV messages or vertical speed required should not be used to maintain terrain or ATC clearances Ter rain and ATC clearances are the sole responsibility of the pilot WARNING Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a NON WGS84 WPT by a system message NON WGS84 WPT waypoints are derived from an unknown map refer
70. the correct missed approach procedure How do I select the missed approach holding point The 500W series unit does not automatically sequence past the MAP Waypoint sequencing to the first waypoint in the missed approach procedure will be enabled when the OBS key is pressed after crossing the MAP All pub lished missed approach procedures must be followed as indicated on the approach plate To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP not recommended select the Active Flight Plan Page and use the direct to key by pressing it twice to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure How do re select the same approach or activate a new approach after a missed approach After flying all missed approach procedures you may reactivate the same approach for another attempt from the Procedures Page Once you have been given clearance for another attempt activate the approach from the Proce dures Page by highlighting Activate Approach and then pressing ENT The 500W series unit provides navigation along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point on See Section 4 Flight Plans Flight Plan Leg Selection for information on activating a specific flight plan leg To activate a new approach for the same airport select the new procedure from the Procedures Page To view the Procedures Page press PROC and turn the large right knob to highlight Select Approach P
71. the identitier is selected then press ENT 6 Toremove the flashing cursor press the small right knob If duplicate waypoints exist see the following pages for a description Airports NDBs and VORs may be selected by identifier facility name or city location Enter a waypoint s facility name or city loca tion on the top or middle line of the Facility City amp Region data field this option applies to airports VORs and NDBs only To enter a waypoint facility name or city location 1 Select the Airport Location Page NDB Page or VOR Page trom the WPT page group 2 Press the small right knob to activate the Cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to select the facility name or location city field 4 Turn the small right knob to select the desired character 5 Turn the large right knob to select the next character field 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the facility name or location is selected then press ENT 122 190 00357 00 Rev H 7 To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob Duplicate Waypoints Once the identifier facility name or location is entered all six airport pages display information for the selected airport As you enter an identifier facility name or location the Spell N Find feature scrolls through the database displaying those waypoints matching the characters you have entered to that point It duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or loc
72. the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor To modify a user waypoint by changing reference 1 waypoint information With the User Waypoint Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor p p 2 Use the small and large right knobs to enter waypoint on the User Waypoint Page and enter the the name of the desired waypoint and press new position information directly over the old intor ENT tion ee MAHON 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the first reference waypoint REF WPT field if you wish to change the reference waypoint Otherwise continue turning the large right knob to highlight the radial RAD or distance DIS field as desired Modify From the User Waypoint Page use the small and large right knobs to modify the position coordinates of an existing user waypoint Modify To modify a user waypoint by changing its lati tude longitude position 1 With the User Waypoint Page displayed press You can modify the location of an exist the small right knob to activate the cursor ing waypoint by changing the reference 2 Use the small and large right knobs to enter Wayport Anaig ee Merada anig the name of the desired waypoint and press ENT 4 Use the small and large right knobs to 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the change the identifier if desired of the position field at the bottom of the page reference waypoint The reference waypoint A ei iadi aace can be an airpor
73. through the list of nearest airports VORs NDBs intersections user waypoints or airspaces Select the desired NRST page using the steps outlined above Press the small right knob to activate the cursor Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list The scroll bar along the right hand side of the page indicates the part of the list that is currently being viewed Turn the large right knob to scroll through a nearest list The scroll bar along the right hand side of the page indicates where you are in the list Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor The Nearest ARTCC and Nearest FSS Pages present detailed information for up to five nearby facilities displaying only one facility at a time Again the additional information is viewed using the flashing cursor and small right knob to scroll through the list 7 NRST PAGES Nearby Waypoints To scroll through the list of nearest flight service station Navigating to a Nearby Waypoint or center points of communication HEAREST ARTCC L cies highlight the number adjacent to the communication point name and turn the small right knob 1 Select the desired NRST page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the small right knob to scroll through the list 4 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor 190 00357 00 Rev H The NRST pages can be used in conjunction with the 500W ser
74. to manually cancel e The active leg or the portion of the approach cur rently in use is depicted in magenta on the Map Page As you fly the approach the 500W series unit automatically sequences through each leg of the approach unless SUSP appears above the For roll steering autopilots roll steering is terminated OBS key SUSP indicates that automatic sequenc Saup 8 when approach mode is selected on the autopilot and ing of approach waypoints is suspended on the current leg and normally appears at holding pat terns and upon crossing the missed approach point MAP 190 00357 00 Rev H is available once the missed approach is initiated e If Vectors to Final is activated while on the FROM side of the FAF automatic waypoint sequencing is 117 5 PROCEDURES Points to Remember suspended and the SUSP annunciation will appear Points to Remember for Localizer or VOR Automatic waypoint sequencing will resume once based Approaches the aircraft is on the TO side of the FAF and within e The default factory setting allows the CDI output to full scale deflection This is a new feature with the 500W series For all approaches and departures make sure to recheck the runway transition and all waypoints If ATC directs you to make a change recheck each automatically switch from the GPS receiver to the LOC receiver This may be changed to manual in some installations If the ILS CDI Se
75. to the arrival time field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the time you wish to use reference for determine RAIM availability Press ENT when finished Compute RAIH Once the destination date and time are entered select Compute RAIM to deter mine if satellite coverage is adequate for the flight The flashing cursor moves to Compute RAIM Press ENT to begin RAIM prediction Once calculations are complete the 500W series unit displays one of the following in the RAIM status field RAIM Not Available Satellite coverage is predicted to NOT be sufficient for reliable operation during non precision approaches RAIM Available Satellite coverage is predicted to be sufficient for reliable operation during all flight phases including non precision approaches NOTE RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within 15 minutes of the specified arrival date and time Refer to Section 11 for more information regard ing RAIM protection limits Software Versions The Software Database Versions Page displays software version information for the operating soft ware within the GPS receiver COM transceiver VOR localizer receiver glideslope receiver and main processor board This page is for information purposes only no user functions are available from this page 190 00357 00 Rev H Software Versions 9 AUX PAGES Setup 1 Page Database Versions Setup 1 Page
76. to unit crossfill was cancelled The host unit is busy Wait until any previous crossfill operation is complete before re attempting the transfer Data transfer cancelled data invalid An attempt to transfer a single user waypoint during a unit to unit crossfill was cancelled No waypoint was specified on the Crossfill Page Select a user waypoint and re attempt the transfer Data transfer cancelled version mismatch An attempt to transfer data during a unit to unit crossfill was cancelled The database versions of the two 500W series unit are not identical If necessary update the database s so they match Contact Jeppesen or your Garmin dealer for assistance Data transfer error please re transmit An error was detected during unit to unit crossfill of user data user waypoints and or flight plans The data transfer should be re attempted 12 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS Data transfer is complete The unit to unit crossfill of all user waypoint data has finished Database changed validate user modified procedures You have modified one or more approaches departures or arrivals from their original published form When the NavData card is replaced database update you must manually verity your changes in the new database This message occurs each time a flight plan containing a modi fied procedure generated from a prior database version is activated To eliminate the message re crea
77. turning it to highlight the desired selection and then press ENT 4 FLIGHT PLANS Active Flight Plan Editing Restore Defaults Restore Defaults returns the data items to fac tory defaults 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options window 2 Turn the small right knob to highlight Restore Defaults and then press ENT Shortcuts A number of shortcuts are available to save time when using the Active Flight Plan Page These short cuts speed the process of removing approaches depar tures and arrivals and aid in selecting a specific flight plan leg for navigation guidance On the preceding page options to remove approaches departures and arrivals were introduced This process may also be completed using the CLR key as described below and illustrated at right To remove an approach departure or arrival using the CLR key Reseve GPS 2 fram flight plan WH or Ho To remove an approach departure or arrival from the active flight plan highlight the procedure name appears in light blue text and press CLR 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the Cursor 190 00357 00 Rev H 71 4 FLIGHT PLANS Flight Plan Shortcuts 2 Turnthe large right knob to highlight the title The Activate Leg option is discussed earlier for the approach departure or arrival you wish which allows
78. vectors to HARTFORD HFD VOR Expect 21149 HFD clearance to requested flight level 10 minutes after departure From over HFD VOR proceed via the We eae HFD R 143 to Thumb Int then via the As you depart the airfield Next DTK 026 in x sec appears in HTO R 010 to o Yoder nt neiaie the lower right corner and SUSP appears above the OBS key m CALVERTON the CCC R 057 to 21172 CCC Indicated distance increases and is FROM the waypoint fix CCC VOR Then via transition or assigned route 3 Flythe outbound course keeping the CDI needle oe centered Once you are cleared to sequence to pans ae the next leg press the OBS key Confirm that SUSP no longer appears directly above the OBS key An alert Next DTK 185 in x sec appears in the lower right corner of the screen to guide you to the next waypoint HFD VOR The actual desired track DTK depends on your ground speed and distance from HFD VOR NOT TO SCALE 4 Once the OBS key is pressed the 500W series DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION unit automatically sequences to each waypoint along the remainder of the departure route including the selected transition EDIC N40 08 8 W073 12 1 1 Select the departure CSTL2 from the Pro cedures Page Then select the departure runway RW02 in this example and transition GEDIC 106 190 00357 00 Rev H ILS Approaches Precision ILS approaches can be performed with t
79. you to specify which leg of the flight to delete Titles appear in light blue directly plan is currently used for navigation guidance A above the procedure s waypoints shortcut also exists for this operation using the 3 Press CLR to display a confirmation window _ direct to key 4 With Yes highlighted press ENT to remove the selected procedure This same process may also be used to remove ACTIVATE LEG individual waypoints from the active flight plan From the Active Flight Plan Page use the direct to key press twice to activate a highlighted route leg To remove an individual waypoint from the active flight plan highlight the waypoint you wish to remove and press RUSE CLR To remove a waypoint using the CLR key 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor including any portion of an instrument 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the procedure such as a procedure turn DME arc identifier for the waypoint you wish to delete Or neiging patel Identifiers appear in green text To activate a specific leg of the active flight plan 3 Press CLR to display a confirmation window 1 Press the small right knob to activate the 4 With Yes highlighted press ENT to remove cursor and turn the large right knob to high the selected procedure light the desired destination waypoint 2 Press direct to twice to display an Activate Leg
80. 0 Rev H User Waypoints all User Waypoint e Transfer Turn the small right knob to display a list of TRANSFER options Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired option Active Flight Plan transfers the active flight plan including VNAV parameters to from a second 500W Series or 400W Series Garmin unit in a dual unit installation This option is the default when selecting Crossfill from the default Nav Page Active Flight Plan information is automatically transterred between units when the Auto method is selected above Flight Plan transfers any stored flight plan to from a second 500W Series or 400W Series unit by selecting the flight plan by number This option is the default when selecting Crossfill from the Flight Plan Cata log User Waypoints all transfers all stored user waypoints to from a second 500W 400W Series unit User Waypoint transfers the specified user waypoint to a second 500W 400W Series unit Continue turning the small right knob to highlight the desired data option Press ENT select the highlighted option 5a OR 5b For a stored flight plan Flight Plan data option the flight plan number field is high lighted Turn the small right knob to select the desired flight plan and press ENT Initiate Transfer For a specified user waypoint User Waypoint data option the waypoint identifier field is highlighted U
81. 00 Rev H To select a VOR frequency from the VOR Page 1 Select the VOR Page from the WPT page group 2 Press the small right knob momentarily to place the cursor on the VOR identifier field It you wish to select another VOR use the small and large right knobs and press ENT when finished 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the frequency field and press ENT to place the frequency in the standby field of the VLOC window Using the large right knob highlight the VOR s frequency and press ENT to place the frequency in the standby VLOC frequency field 4 To activate the standby VLOC frequency press the VLOC flip flop key 190 00357 00 Rev H 6 WPT PAGES User Waypoints User Waypoint Page In addition to the airport VOR NDB and intersec tion information contained in your Jeppesen NavData card the 500W series unit allows you to store up to 1 000 user defined waypoints The User Waypoint Page displays the waypoint name up to five charac ters long identifier and radial from two reference waypoints distance from one reference waypoint along with the user waypoint latitude longitude posi tion User Waypoint Reference Waypoint N ame Information Latitude Longitude Position Create Modif Action Fiel Tenth Page in WPT Group Modify To display information for a user waypoint highlight the name field Then use the small and large right knobs to enter the waypoint name
82. 0357 00 Rev H From the Flight Plan Catalog Press the small right knob to activate the cursor turn the large right knob to highlight the flight plan you wish to delete then press MENU to display the Flight Plan Catalog Options Turn the large right knob to highlight Delete Flight Plan and press ENT With Yes highlighted press ENT to delete the flight plan 69 4 FLIGHT PLANS Flight Plan Catalog Options Delete All Flight Plans Delete All Flight Plans allows you to remove all flight plans from memory at one time Activate Flight Plan Invert amp Activate FPL Create New Flight Plan Copy Flight Plan Delete Flight Plan Delete All Flight Plans Sort List By Number Select Delete Flight Plan to remove the highlighted flight plan from memory Delete All Flight Plans removes all flight plans from memory To delete all flight plans 1 Select the Delete All Flight Plans option from the Flight Plan Catalog Options and press ENT 2 A confirmation window appears With Yes highlighted press ENT Sort List By Number Comment Sort List By Number Sort List by Comment allows you to select between a Flight Plan Catalog sorted numerically by the flight plan number or sorted alphanumerically based upon the comment assigned to each flight plan When either option is selected the other option appears on the Flight Plan Catalog Options window To sort the catalog
83. 115 RNAV Approach Procedures 0 ccccccseeeeee 117 Points to Remember for ALL Approaches 117 Points to Remember for Localizer or VOR based Approaches ssssssssssssssssrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnnnnnnnssnnnnns 118 Enabling Autopilot Outputs for the King KAP140 KFC225 aaa 120 Section 6 WPT Pages cusses 121 WPT Page Group c cece 121 Finding the Desired Airport 0 0 ccccccceeee 122 Duplicate Waypoint 00 0 c ccs testers 123 Airport Location Page 124 Airport Location Page Options s 125 Airport Runway Page 125 Airport Runway Page Options 126 Airport Frequency Pag 0 c ccccsessseseeseeen 127 Airport Frequency Page Options 128 Airport Approach Pag 0 c ccccccsseseeeen 129 Airport Approach Page Options ccscsesesessesseeen 130 Airport Arrival Page 0 0 cccccccscesteeeesteeeeseean 132 Airport Arrival Page Options csscescesssesesseesesseesreaees 133 Airport Departure Page ccs 134 Airport Departure Page Options B3 Intersection Page 136 NDB Page ee ee eee eee eer ee 137 VOR oo 1 erp eet men nen rr T 138 User Waypoint Page uu ccc essences 139 Creating User Waypoints csssecssssessssssscsssssseeees 140 Creating User Waypoints trom the Map Page 142 Modifying User Waypoints c cessessesseesessesseaneerees 143 User Waypoint Page Options 144 SEL Wayom LIS aaraa 145 Section 7
84. 200 Geodesic 209 Glideslope 199 212 GNS 530W AW 1 GPS 200 212 GPS 500W 1 Great circle 209 HFOM 56 Hide aviation data 45 222 190 00357 00 Rev H Hold 92 204 HSI 59 Ident audio and volume 161 IFR procedures 17 ILS 107 186 ILS CDI Selection 108 118 183 186 Inhibit Terrain 45 Instrument panel self test 6 Integ 8 54 176 206 213 Interfaces 212 Intersection 136 153 Inverting flight plans 67 J Jeppesen 211 K Keys 2 Key stuck 198 King autopilot 120 Knobs 2 L LNAV VNAV Approach 85 114 116 Localizer 212 Localizer Approach 118 Local time 188 Low alt 85 LPV Approach 85 113 Magnetic variation 186 MAHP 218 Manual transition 134 Map Auto zoom 34 Datum 187 Page 14 33 38 APPENDIX D Index Panning 35 Range 31 Scale 34 126 Setup 39 Symbols 34 MAPR 85 Map scale 14 Menu 3 Messages 4 8 MGRS 183 187 Minimum safe altitude 31 210 Missed approach 91 218 MOA 185 Model descriptions 1 Moditying user waypoints 143 MSA 31 210 MSG 4 Navcom 52 NavData Card 211 Navigation database 48 Navigation Terms 209 Nav pages 12 29 Nav Terms 197 NDB 137 153 Nearest 19 149 Nearest airport 184 Next FPL airport 126 128 133 135 NRST 4 18 0 OBS 4 201 215 OCN 85 Overzoom 34 P Packing list ii Page groups 10 Page summary 10 Panning 35 Parallel track 75 190 00357 00 Rev H 223 APPENDIX D Index Physical size 212 Position 183 186 Power 2 212 P
85. 3 NM to 350 feet full scale deflection As you approach the MAP an Arriving at waypoint alert appears in the lower right corner of the screen As you cross the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS key indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is sus pended at the MAP A trom indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page but course guidance along the final approach course continues Do NOT follow this extended course Follow published missed approach procedures using the OBS key to initiate the missed approach sequence 5 PROCEDURES Vectors To Final Approach Vectors to Final Lets take a second look at the VOR 22 approach into Billard Municipal Instead of following the DME arc ATC tells you to expect vectors onto the final approach course There are several ways to select vec tors to final with the 500W series unit The first two options below normally require the least workload to accomplish e When the approach is first selected choose VEC TORS from the transitions TRANS window Load a full approach including the IAF from the transitions window When cleared press PROC and select Activate Vectors To Final e Load the full approach Use the direct to key by pressing it twice from the Active Flight Plan Page to select the desired leg of the approach To select VECTORS from the transitions window 1 Select Billard Muni KTOP
86. 30W and GNS 530AW models Please note that the difference between the GNS 530W and GNS 530AW is indicated under VHF COM Performance in the Specifications section of this manual see Appendix B Before installing and getting started with your new system please ensure that your package includes the following items If any parts are missing or are dam aged please contact your Garmin dealer Standard Package e Garmin 500W series Unit e NavData Card e Terrain Card e GPS Antenna Installation Rack amp Connectors Pilots Guide Quick Reference 400W 500W Series Display Interfaces Addendum 400W 500W Series Garmin Optional Display Interfaces Addendum GNS 400W 500W series Simulator Training CD ROM Database Subscription Packet Warranty Registration Card NOTE Unless otherwise specified within this manual INTRODUCTION Accessories and Packing List Upgrade Package e Garmin 500W series Unit e NavData Card e Terrain Card Optional e GPS Antenna Pilots Guide amp Reference Quick Reference 400W 500W Series Display Interfaces Addendum 400W 500W Series Garmin Optional Display Interfaces Addendum GNS 400W 500W series Simulator Training CD ROM Database Subscription Packet e Warranty Registration Card Your Garmin dealer will perform the installation and configuration of your new 500W series After installation the NavData card will already be installed into the correct slot on the front of the unit see
87. 357 00 Rev H LAE STR ePeCe Status and Time to Entry Eighth Page z E in NRST Group Airspace Name Message Annunciator Press the small right knob to activate the cursor Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the desired airspace View Frequencies HRST i STEP 3 amp 4 From the Nearest Airspace Page highlight the desired airspace and press ENT to display additional airspace information Press ENT to display the Airspace Information Page for the selected nearby airspace To return to the Nearest Airspace Page verity that Done is highlighted by the flashing cursor and press ENT Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor To view and quickly tune the frequency for a controlling agency 1 Follow steps 1 through 4 on the previous page to display the Airspace Information Page for the desired controlled or special use airspace Done Field return to previous page Floor Ceiling Limits View Frequencies Field display 4 Frequency Page Airspace Name Status and Time to Entry 5 Turn the large right knob to highlight View 6 Frequencies and press ENT View Frequencies NRST i Highlight View Frequencies and press ENT to display the communication frequency s for the controlling agency Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the desired frequency 190 00357 00 Rev H 7 NRST
88. 4 0 NM for oceanic remote and 2 0 NM for en route 1 0 NM for terminal and 0 3 NM for non precision ap proaches During oceanic en route and terminal phases of flight RAIM is available nearly 100 of the time Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches there may be times when RAIM is not available The 500W series unit automatically monitors RAIM and warns you with an alert message see Section 12 when it is not available and the INTEG annunciator INTEG appears at the bottom left corner of the screen If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF the pilot must fly the missed approach procedure The 500W series unit RAIM prediction func tion see Section 9 Aux Pages Utility Page RAIM Predic tion also allows you to see whether RAIM will be available for a specified date and time NOTE RAIM prediction is not directly related to WAAS integrity RAIM integrity prediction is performed by the internal GPS receiver and is performed at all times WAAS integrity is reported by the WAAS satellite system and only works within the WAAS service volume WAAS approaches require WAAS integrity Outside of the WAAS service volume such as an Oce anic flight RAIM prediction will be used 190 00357 00 Rev H 215 APPENDIX C Troubleshooting Q amp A Why aren t there any approaches available for my flight plan Approaches are available for the final destination air port in a flight plan or as a direct to keep in m
89. 58 Copying flight plans 68 Count down timer 178 202 Course from 102 Course from fix 102 104 106 Course To 63 Creating user waypoints 140 Crossfill 71 Cross side 174 Crossfill 68 145 173 199 CRSR 3 205 CTAF 25 127 152 205 Cursor 3 D Database i iii 25 32 43 46 48 84 130 162 168 181 Database version 5 47 176 181 199 Data base integrity error 197 198 201 202 Data fields 13 32 41 55 70 184 189 Data transfer 173 199 Date 167 172 1 6 180 181 183 188 213 Dead reckoning 57 200 Declutter 14 35 Default Nav page 13 30 Density altitude 167 170 Departure 17 74 83 134 216 Departure time 170 175 178 DG heading 216 Direct To 3 16 19 36 59 Cancelling 63 City 60 Facility 60 Display backlight 184 188 198 Distance 187 Distance measurements 40 DME arc 30 96 DP 83 134 205 Dual units 32 Duplicate waypoints 123 E E6B 165 166 EFF 205 209 EFIS 141 198 Emergency channel 2 28 ENDUR 169 205 209 ENR 85 205 ENT 205 Enter 3 Environmental 212 EPU 56 205 209 F Facility name 60 122 123 124 137 138 155 156 Factory settings 32 42 191 Fault detection 196 FDE 56 196 205 FIR 18 149 205 Flight plan 4 21 65 166 Activate leg 78 Create new 6 7 Delete 69 Editing 65 Flight timers 175 178 Flip tlop key 2 Floor 36 159 185 FPL 4 Frequency list 15 26 52 127 FSS 18 26 149 150 156 206 Fuel 187 Fuel on board 7 Fuel planning 166 168 G GAD
90. A GARMIN 500W Series Pilot s Guide amp Reference Foreword Garmin International Inc 1200 East 151st Street Olathe Kansas 66062 U S A Tel 913 397 8200 Fax 913 397 8282 Garmin AT Inc 2345 Turner Rd S E Salem Oregon 97302 U S A Tel 503 581 8101 Fax 503 364 2138 Garmin Europe Ltd Liberty House Bulls Copse Road Hounsdown Business Park Southhampton SO40 9RB U K Tel 44 0 870 850 1243 Fax 44 0 238 052 4004 Garmin Corporation No 68 Zhangshu 2 Road Xizhi Dist New Taipei City 221 Taiwan R O C Tel 886 02 2642 9199 Fax 886 02 2642 9099 Web Site Address www garmin com or https fly garmin com fly garmin This manual reflects the operation of Main System Software versions 2 00 3 00 4 00 5 00 or later Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions 2012 Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries All rights reserved Except as expressly provided herein no part of this manual may be reproduced copied transmitted disseminated downloaded or stored in any storage medium for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin Garmin hereby grants permission to down load a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for personal use provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain
91. ALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER RESULTING FROM THE USE MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations may not apply to you Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace the unit or software or to offer a full refund of the pur chase price at its sole discretion SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY To obtain warranty service contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center For assistance in locating a Service Center near you visit the Garmin Web site at http Avww garmin com or contact Garmin Customer Service at 800 800 1020 iv 190 00357 00 Rev H INTRODUCTION Table of Contents Contents Section 2 NAV Pages 29 COUNTING iirc svictacs at scictest ssesttenintcstvecnes inielaaoniagt Main Page Groups 29 Introduction i age OUD aie reme ee ance ana Accessories and Packing List 0 c cccccscseeeen i Page si eae iaaii a a a 7 Limited WATAY ccccccccccceeeeeeeecoe i Turn Advisory and Waypoint Alert 00 0 0 000 29 p Default NAV Page uu cscs cesteeseesteaseesean 30 Model Descriptions 0 0 ccccccceseseeseeseesesseaseeen GPS BOOW a a a Sa Datini iaaa estorng Factor seing asua iaaa Se a a Dual Unit Considerations Crossfill
92. AP The course width and angular deviation for GPS approaches are similar to what is provided for VHF localizer signals see the fig ure Full Scale deflection and defined path for VTF ap proach If a missed approach is executed the CDI scale will change to 0 3 NM or 1 0 NM as described in Section 5 Procedures Flying the Missed Approach Not to scale 2 degree angular Full Scale deflection and defined path for normal approach Sensitivity must change from 1 NM FSD to either 0 3 NM or 2 FSD whichever is less at the FAF Change occurs over 2 NM and is completed at the FAF APPENDIX C Troubleshooting Q amp A 2 degree 350 ft Course width is 1 NM at angular approximately 27 NM from MAP Not to scale Full Scale deflection and defined path for VTF approach Why does my CDI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active Unlike a VOR the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the cross track distance to the desired course in OBS mode not an angular relationship to the desti nation Therefore the CDI deflection on the GPS is con stant regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when you are further away from the destination For more information on the CDI scale see Section 9 Aux Pages Setup Page CDI Alarms 2NM 2NM e 2NM 2NM CDI Comparison GPS vs VOR 190 00357 00 Rev H 219 APPENDIX C Troubleshooting Q amp A What is
93. AV Page are four user definable fields which display the data you need as your flight progresses Enable Auto oom Change Fields To change the data type displayed at any of the four corners on the page press MENU and select the Change Fields option By default these fields display desired track DTK distance to destination DIS ground speed GS and estimated time en route ETE However each of these fields can be custom tailored to your preferences by selecting a different data item Available data items include Bearing to destination BRG e Distance to destination DIS Desired track DTK En Route safe altitude ESA Estimated time of arrival ETA Estimated time en route ETE e Total Fuel Flow FLOW Ground speed GS e Minimum sate altitude MSA e Track angle error TKE Ground track TRK e Vertical speed required VSR e Cross track error XTK 190 00357 00 Rev H 3 2 NAV PAGES Default NAV Page If no flight plan or direct to destination has been selected only speed track altitude fuel flow and min imum safe altitude data may be displayed All other data types appear as blank lines on the Default NAV Page until a destination is selected To select a different data item for any data field 1 Starting with the Default NAV Page press the MENU key to display an options menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Change Fields and p
94. Appendix A The 500W series will be secured in the installation rack with the proper wiring connections Have your dealer answer any questions you may have about the installation such as location of antennas or any connections to other equipment in the panel Helicopter Installations In Helicopter installations the ownship icon is set to a helicopter When present HTAWS will be used instead of TAWS See the Garmin Optional Displays Pilots Guide Addendum P N 190 00356 30 Rev G or later for HTAWS information 190 00357 00 Rev H iii INTRODUCTION Warranty Limited Warranty This Garmin product is warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase Within this period Garmin will at its sole option repair or replace any components that fail in normal use Such repairs or replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts and labor provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost This warranty does not cover failures due to abuse misuse accident or unauthorized alterations or repairs THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE IN NO EVENT SH
95. EST When the 500W series unit is first powered on an Acquiring status appears at the top of the page and no signal strength bars are displayed e Hollow signal strength bars the receiver has found the satellite s and is collecting data e Cross hatch cyan signal strength bars the receiver has found the satellite s but it has been excluded by the FDE program as a faulty satellite Solid cyan signal strength bars the receiver has collected the necessary data but is not using the satellite in the position solution e Solid green signal strength bars the receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite is being used in the position solution The D character inside the bars indicates differ ential corrections e g WAAS are being used for that satellite The Time and other data may not be displayed until the unit has acquired enough satellites for a fix 54 190 00357 00 Rev H 2 NAV PAGES Satellite Status Page 3 Turn the small right knob to display the list of available data items Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired data item trom the list Mm GSL GPS MSL Altitude l eames d 5S Ground Speed e l MSA Min Safe Alt As satellites are received the status changes COO TRK Track to 3D Navigation 3D Navigation includes altitude The sky view display at the top left corner of the nF page shows the satellites currently in
96. FAF depending upon the performance characteristics of your autopilot and aircratt In such instances you should manually fly the approach or refer to the documentation provided with your autopilot e When an ILS or VOR approach is first selected or executed the frequency is automatically checked It the frequency is correct you will not receive a message regarding the frequency If the frequency is incorrect you will receive a message and you must place the ILS or VLOC frequency in the active fre quency field APT 34 558 116 56 CF21 S IFLG SHUTR J T KFLG ES 21 Lome 20 Activate 5 PROCEDURES Points to Remember GPS guidance may be used while flying outbound and on the initial portion of the procedure turn VLOC guidance is used on the remainder of the approach trom the time you turn inbound on the procedure turn The localizer frequency must be active to use VLOC guidance at the MAP Press the CDI key to switch back to GPS data when the missed approach is initiated e When flying a localizer based approach with auto matic CDI switching disabled VLOC must appear in the lower left corner above the CDI key in order to use the VLOC receiver with your external CDI and autopilot You may select VLOC guidance at any point on the approach prior to reaching the FAF The localizer trequency must be active to use When an ILS approach is first selected the ILS frequenc
97. FR Visual Flight Rules VLOC VOR Localizer Receiver VNAV Vertical Navigation VOL Volume VOR VHF Omnidirectional Radio Range VPL Vertical Protection Level VS Vertical Speed VSR Vertical Speed Required 210 190 00357 00 Rev H Navigation Terms The following navigation terms are used on the 500W series unit NORTH ALT altitude Height above mean sea level MSL BRG bearing The compass direction from your present position to a destination waypoint CAS calibrated airspeed Indicated airspeed corrected for instrument errors CUM cumulative The total of all legs in a flight plan such as cumulative distance DIS distance The geodesic path from your pres ent position to a destination waypoint DTK desired track The desired course between the active from and to waypoints EFF efficiency A measure of fuel consumption 12 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS expressed in distance per fuel units e g nautical miles per gallon ENDUR endurance Flight endurance or total available flight time based upon available fuel EPU estimated position uncertainty A measure of satellite geometry quality and additional factors expressed as a horizontal position error in feet or meters ESA en route safe altitude The recommended minimum altitude within a ten mile radius of your course on an active fligh
98. GPS position solution e The system must have a valid terrain obstacle air port terrain database Terrain Limitations NOTE 500W Series units may display either a TERRAIN Page or a TAWS Page or neither but not both depending upon the installed hardware and configuration TERRAIN displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the aircraft The displayed alerts are advisory in nature only Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database However all obstructions may not be available in the database and data may be inaccurate Never use this information for navigation or to maneuver to avoid obstacles Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies Terrain information should be used as an aid to situational awareness Never use it for navigation or to maneuver to avoid terrain 2 NAV PAGES Terrain Operation TERRAIN uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content per TSO C151b However the displayed information should never be understood as being all inclusive TERRAIN Alerting TERRAIN uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements GPS altitude is converted to a mean sea level MSL based altitude GSL altitude and is used to
99. MGRS or UTM UPS 4 The Active Flight Plan Page appears Press FPL e RAD Radial from nearest VOR in degrees to return to the Airport Departure Page magnetic or degrees true depend ing upon unit configuration e DIS Distance from nearest VOR in nautical miles statute miles kilome ters depending upon unit configu ration is the nearest VOR not necessarily the VOR used to define the intersection A NOTE The VOR displayed on the Intersection Page Intersections may only be selected by identifier 136 190 00357 00 Rev H NDB Page The NDB page displays the facility name city region country latitude and longitude for the selected NDB The NDB page also displays the frequency and a weather broadcast indication if applicable There are no options for the NDB page The following descrip tions and abbreviations are used Identifier and Symbol Latitude Longitude Position Facility Name City pe and Region Country Frequency and Weather Broadcast Indication Fighth Page in pea WPT Group e Symbol For a graphic illustration of available NDB symbols see Sec 2 Nav Pages Map Page Position Latitude Longitude degrees minutes or degrees minutes sec onds MGRS or UTM UPS FREQ Frequency in kilohertz kHz e Wx Brdcst Weather information is broadcast on the selected facility s fre quency NDBs may be selected by identifier facility name or location city 190 00357
100. NRST at the bottom of the screen Turn the small right knob to select the desired page within the group 190 00357 00 Rev H 149 7 NRST PAGES NRST Pages Scrolling To quickly select a NRST page In the GPS 500W press NRST For the GNS 530W do the following 1 1 From any page press and hold the CLR key to select the Default NAV Page You may skip gt this step if you are already viewing any of the main pages 2 Turn the large right knob to select the NRST page group NRST appears at the bottom of the screen HEAREST AIRPORT Turn the large right knob to select the NRST page group NRST appears at the bottom of the screen 3 Turnthe small right knob to select the desired NRST page Not all 25 nearest airports VORs NDBs inter sections or user waypoints can be displayed on the corresponding NRST page at one time The Nearest Airport Page displays detailed information for four nearest airports with a scroll bar along the right hand side of the page indicating the part of the list that is currently being viewed The Nearest Airspace Page dis plays detailed information for up to four special use or controlled airspace alerts The NRST pages for VORs NDBs intersections and user waypoints display eight waypoints at a time The flashing cursor and large right knob are used to scroll and view the rest of the waypoints or airspaces in the list 150 190 00357 00 Rev H Ta To scroll
101. Note that the airspace alerts are based upon three dimensional data latitude longitude and altitude to avoid nuisance alerts The alert boundaries for controlled airspace are also sectorized to provide complete information on any nearby airspace Addi tional information about a nearby airspace such as controlling agency frequency and floor ceiling limits is available from the nearest airspace page 20 190 00357 00 Rev H Flight Plans The 500W series unit lets you create up to 20 flight plans with up to 100 waypoints in each flight plan Flight plans are created edited and activated using the FPL key The FPL page group includes two pages the Active Flight Plan Page and the Flight Plan Catalog The Active Flight Plan Page provides informa tion and editing features for the flight plan currently in use referred to as flight plan 00 The Flight Plan Catalog serves as the main page for creating new flight plans as well as editing or activating previously cre ated flight plans Active Flight Plan Page with flight plan cur rently in use Since using flight plans is arguably one of the more complex features of the 500W series unit we ll only dis cuss it briefly here focusing on creating a new flight plan and activating it to use for navigation Additional information about flight plans can be found in the Flight Plan section Section 4 To create a new flight plan 1 Press the FPL key and turn the s
102. OCEDURES Procedure Turn Approach CDI needle swings to the opposite side to provide proper sensing along the final course segment and Next DTK 025 appears in the lower right corner of the screen As the CDI needle starts to center make a right turn to 025 the final approach course KILBE HURT T coors i Re 10r Procedure turn inbound The CDI needle swings to the oppo site side for proper sensing and Next DTK 025 now appears Turn to the new heading as the needle begins to center When within 45 of the final approach course and the FAF is the TO waypoint the 500W series unit switches trom terminal mode to approach mode CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 NM full scale deflection to either 0 3 NM or 2 full scale deflection whichever is less at the FAF The change occurs over 2 NM and is completed by the FAF As you approach the FAF a waypoint alert in the lower right corner Next DTK 026 in x sec appears Make any course adjustments necessary for the final course segment FAF to MAP As you cross the FAF the destination sequences to the MAP RW04 the runway threshold With the needle centered fly toward the MAP observing the altitude minimums dictated by the approach plate 89 5 PROCEDURES Missed Approach 127650 Ps As you cross the FAF the 500W series unit automatically As you cross the missed approach point SUSP appears on sequences to the final
103. PS to etc are not applicable to the external CDI or HSI VLOG should occur when VLOC is active 190 00357 00 Rev H 107 5 PROCEDURES ILS Approach GNS 530W only NOTE If you attempt to intercept the approach course at a distance less than 2 0 NM from the FAF the GNS 530W does not automatically switch the CDI to VLOC In this case press the CDI key to manually switch from GPS to VLOC The automatic switch from GPS to VLOC is not immediate but instead occurs gradually to prevent abrupt CDI changes when coupled to an autopilot The CDI selection can also be changed manually by press ing the CDI key Once the switch from GPS to VLOC has occured either automatically or manually it does not automatically switch again until the approach is reactivated or another approach is selected To prevent automatic ILS CDI selection choose the Manual ILS CDI setting the factory default setting is Auto which enables the automatic switch to VLOC see AUX Setup 1 Within the shaded area of the previous run way illustration the GNS 530W automatically switches the external CDI to the GNS 530W s internal VLOC receiver VLOC appears above the CDI key Selecting an ILS Approach For this example we ll use a flight trom Laughlin Bullhead Arizona International KIFP to Flag staff Pulliam KFLG and select the ILS runway 21 approach SHUTR intersection is selected as the IAF which includes an
104. SS ARTCC frequency and press ENT to place the frequency in the standby field of the COM window To select a COM frequency for any airport in your flight plan 1 Select the NAVCOM Page from the NAV page group See Section 2 or press and hold CLR then turn the small right knob until the NAVCOM Page appears DEFARTURE i The NAVCOM Page provides a frequency list for all the airports departure en route and arrival along your active flight plan Press the small right knob to place the cursor on the airport identifier field To the left of this field appears Departure En Route or Arrival depending on the placement of the dis played airport within your flight plan Turn the small right knob to display a window listing the airports in your flight plan Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired airport Press ENT to return to the NAVCOM Page with the trequencies for the selected airport Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired frequency Press ENT to place the highlighted frequency in the standby COM window field 190 00357 00 Rev H GNS 530W only 1 COM To select a COM frequency for any airport in the database 1 Select the Airport Frequencies Page trom the WPT page group See Section 6 or turn the large right knob to select the WPT page group Then turn the small right knob until the Airport Frequencies Page appears Use the Airport Frequencies Page to retri
105. STATUS YERT LIHITS View Frequencies EE Press ENT to view the frequencies Turn the large right knob to scroll through the avail able frequencies To automatically load a frequency into the Com standby position turn the large right knob to highlight a frequency and then press ENT eT 125 750 WPT OOS000000000 For frequency information turn the large right knob to highlight an Info selection 37 2 NAV PAGES Map Page Options 8 Press ENT to view the frequency information Press ENT with Done highlighted to return to the airspace frequency display 9 Turn the large knob to highlight Done and press ENT to return to the Nav page Press the small right CRSR knob to remove the map pointer Map Page Options Many of the 500W series functions are menu driven Each of the main pages has an options menu allowing you to custom tailor the corresponding page to your preferences and or select special features which specifically relate to that page A Map Page Options menu provides additional settings to cus tomize the Map Page and additional features related specifically to the Map Page With the Map Page displayed press MENU to display the Map Page Options menu Use the large right knob to select the desired option The following options are available Setup Map Measure Dist Data Fields Off Clear Storm Data Change Fields and Restore Detau
106. VIATIONS amp NAV TERMS G S is not responding GNS 530W only Internal system to system communication between the main proces sor and the glideslope receiver has failed Operational status of the glideslope receiver is unknown and the unit should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service G S needs service GNS 530W only The unit has detected a failure in its glideslope receiver The glideslope receiver may still be usable but the unit should be returned at your earliest convenience to your Garmin dealer for service GAD configuration required The GAD 42 Interface Adapter has lost the configuration information stored in its internal memory Any mechanical indicators connected to your 500W series unit are unusable and the GAD 42 should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service GAD needs service The 500W series unit has detected a failure in the GAD 42 interface adapter Any mechanical indi cators connected to your unit are unusable and the GAD 42 should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service GDL 69 is not responding No data is being received from the GDL 69 If the problem persists contact your Garmin dealer for service GDL 88 is unable to transmit ADS B messages The GDL 88 is reporting that it has a problem transmit ting ADS B messages The unit may not be trasmitting ADS B information correctly and the traffic picture may be degraded GDL 88 Service Required The GDL 88 is
107. Waypoint or Desired Course between Two Waypoints Right Procedure Turn Left Procedure Turn Vectors To Final DME Arc to the left DME Arc to the right Left Hand Holding Pattern pest Right Hand Holding Pattern 30 190 00357 00 Rev H O NOTE The 500W series unit always navigates TO a waypoint unless the OBS switch is set preventing automatic waypoint sequencing or you have passed the last waypoint in your flight plan Directly above the CDI the active leg of your flight plan is shown or the direct to destination when using the direct to key This automatically sequences to the next leg of your flight plan as you reach each interim waypoint If no flight plan or direct to destination has been selected this line remains blank The scale of the look ahead map display appears in the bottom left corner The displayed scale is the distance from the bottom to the top of the viewable area on the screen Nine scale settings ranging from 5 0 NM to 200 NM are available Use the RNG key to select the desired range Nine map scale settings are available on the Default NAV Page from 5 0 to 200 NM To adjust the map range use the RNG key To adjust the map range 1 Press the up arrow on the RNG key to zoom out to a larger area OR 2 Press the down arrow on the RNG key to zoom in to a smaller area 2 NAV PAGES Default NAV Page Selecting Desired On Screen Data At the corners of the Default N
108. ad an arrival procedure from the Airport Arrival Page 1 Select the desired arrival transition and runway using the steps above 2 Press MENU to display the Airport Arrival Page Options As described earlier in this section 190 00357 00 Rev H 133 6 WPT PAGES Airport Departures To manually transition to a loaded arrival proce Airport Departure Page dure The Airport Departure Page shows the available Airport Departure Procedures DPs also referred to as SIDs for the selected airport Where multiple runways or transitions are associated with the departure pro cedure that information may also be displayed A map 2 When the desired loaded arrival waypoint is image provides a layout diagram for each departure highlighted press the direct to key then runway and transition 1 From the Active Flight Plan Page press the small right knob to activate the cursor and scroll down through the list of loaded arrival waypoints press ENT to highlight the Activate prompt identifier Symbol Map Image note that any loaded arrival waypoint may be and Type selected APT 472000 Departure 3 Press ENT again to confirm activation Procedure Name Runways Associated 11540 kz with Departure END bss Transitions Sixth Page in i WPT Group To scroll through the available departures 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor
109. allons Instrument Landing System Indicated Intersection Integrity Imminent Terrain Impact Kilograms kHz Kilohertz km Kilometers kph Kilometers Per Hour kt Knots L VNAV Lateral and vertical navigation guidance LNAV VNAV service level LAT LON Latitude Longitude lb Pounds LCL Local LFOB Left over Fuel On Board LNAV LNAV V Lateral Navigation with advisory vertical guidance Lateral Navigation only LOC Localizer LPV Lateral Precision Performance with Vertical Guidance LRES Left over Fuel Reserve Time Lrg Large It Liters M Degrees Magnetic m mt Meters MAP Missed Approach Point MAHP Missed Approach Hold Point MAPR Missed approach guidance mb Millibars of Pressure Med Medium MGRS Military Grid Reference System A 190 00357 00 Rev H MHz mi MOA mph mpm mps MSA MSG MSL mul NATNL NAV NAVAID NDB NM NRST NUM OBS OCN PDA P POS PROC PROV PTK Position format Megahertz Statute Miles Military Operations Area Statute Miles Per Hour Meters Per Minute Meters Per Second Minimum Safe Altitude Message Mean Sea Level Multicom National Navigation Navigational Aid Non Directional Radio Beacon Nautical Miles Nearest Number Omnibearing Selector Oceanic Premature Descen
110. also includes a TSO d airborne VHF communications transceiver and a TSO d airborne VOR Localizer and Glideslope receiv ers This multipurpose unit is available with either a 10 watt GNS 530W or 16 watt GNS 530AW Com transceiver References to the GNS 530W also include the GNS 530AW Takeoff Tour This Takeoff Tour is intended to provide a brief introduction of the 500W series major features The rest of this manual describes these features and others in additional detail Use this guide as needed to learn or review the details regarding a particular feature The Index may be used to quickly locate the information you want Before flying with your 500W series unit take the time to review the information in the manuals and practice with the trainer After you re familiar with the basics some sug gested reading within the Reference section includes e Flight plan features Section 4 e Waypoint information pages database information Section 6 IFR procedures Section 5 e Aux pages Unit settings configuring the unit to your preferences Section 9 If you re unable to locate the information you need we re here to help Garmin s Customer Service staff is available during normal business hours U S Central time zone at the phone and fax numbers listed on page ii You can also reach us by mail see page ii or at our web site address www garmin com 190 00357 00 Rev H 1 TAKEOFF TOUR Key and Knob Functi
111. amed with no flight plan route may be transferred In this case only the user waypoints will be transferred and no flight plans will be modified A message will appear to indicate this A NOTE Flight plan files that contain only user waypoints 6 Once all flight plans have been loaded power off the unit 7 Remove the Flight Plan Card from the right card slot and place the Terrain Card back into the empty card slot NOTE The Flight Plan Card is only to be used on the ground It must be removed prior to flight Apply power to the unit To activate a newly transferred flight plan refer to Section Four Activating Flight Plans 190 00357 00 Rev H 81 4 FLIGHT PLANS Blank Page 82 190 00357 00 Rev H Section 5 Procedures Approaches Departures amp Arrivals The 500W series unit allows you to fly non preci sion and precision approaches to airports with pub lished instrument approach procedures All available approaches are stored on your Jeppesen NavData card and are automatically updated when you replace the card with a new one Subscription information for Nav Data cards is included in your 500W series package The Procedures Page is displayed by pressing the PROC key The Procedures Page provides direct access to approaches departures and arrivals based upon the active flight plan or direct to destination In either case the departure and destination airports must have publish
112. an waypoint Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of each flight plan waypoint Once all waypoints have been entered press the small right knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Crossfill Crossfill allows you to transfer a direct to destina tion the active flight plan including VNAV parameters any stored flight plan or user waypoints to a second 400W series or 500W series Garmin unit See Section 9 Aux Pages Flight Planning Crossfill Operation for additional details on using the Crossfill option Copying Flight Plans Copy Flight Plan allows you to copy the selected flight plan to a new flight plan location The copy function is useful for duplicating an existing flight plan before making changes If you wish to save a flight plan currently located in flight plan 00 copy it to an open catalog location 1 19 before the flight plan is cancelled overwritten or erased Copy to Flight Plan 5 Use the Copy Flight Plan option to save a copy of a flight plan to another memory location This is useful for saving the active flight plan or to save a stored flight plan before editing flight plan 00 and overwrites the previous contents of the flight plan memory location A NOTE Once a flight plan is activated it is copied to 190 00357 00 Rev H To copy a flight plan to another Flight Plan Cata log location 1a From the Active Flight Plan Page
113. and TDZE 2503 o5 47 hold 0 0 5 As you cross the MAP SUSP appear above the OBS key 1 After crossing the MAP press the OBS key The indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints missed approach A eO IS automatically is suspended at the MAP Press OBS to initiate a missed ap offered starting with the course from fix to proach altitude leg The Next DTK 282 in x sec waypoint alert appears in the lower right corner TYPE 2 Course from fix to altitude of the screen Follow the missed approach pro Course from fix to altitude legs shows the specific cedures as published on your approach plate target altitude on the Active Flight Plan and Default for proper climb and heading instructions NAV Pages The missed approach sequence for the 2 Note that within a few seconds of pressing Palmdale VOR DME RWY 25 approach includes a B OBS to release suspend mode and start the course from fix to altitude leg In this instance the missed approach sequence SUSP re appears leg corresponds to the initial phase of the missed above the OBS key as the 500W series unit approach which reads Climb to 5000 outbound via returns to suspend mode This is normal when PMD VOR R 282 flying a course from fix to altitude leg and indicates that automatic leg sequencing is suspended 104 190 00357 00 Rev H Within a few seconds of pressing OBS to start the missed approach SUSP
114. and VLOC frequency fields The COM flip flop key GNS 530W is used to swap the active and standby COM frequencies Press and hold to select emergency channel 121 500 MHz The VLOC flip flop key GNS 530W is used to swap the active and standby VLOC frequencies Q e make the selected standby frequency active GNS 530W On the GNS 530W the large and small left knobs allow you to tune the desired COM or VLOC frequency TAKEOFF TOUR Key and Knob Functions Right hand Keys and Knobs With the on screen cursor enabled The range key RNG allows you to the large right knob allows you to me select the desired map scale Use the move the cursor about the page up arrow side of the key to zoom out p y The small right knob PUSH CRSR to a larger area or the down arrow B E eens is used to select between the various pages within one of the groups listed The direct to key direct to pro above Press this knob momentarily vides access to the direct to function to display the on screen cursor which allows you to enter a destina The cursor allows you to enter data tion waypoint and establishes a direct and or make a selection from a list of course to the selected destination options See Section 3 The menu key MENU displays a context sensitive list of options This options list allows you to access additional features or make settings changes which relate to the currently displayed page The clear key CLR i
115. ange Frequency Range Frequency Range INTERFACES e Garmin GDL 69 69A e ARINC 429 e Aviation RS 232 e CDI HSI e RMI digital clock data e Superflag Out e Altitude serial Icarus Shadin Rosetta or encoded Gillham Greycode e Fuel Sensor e Fuel Air Data L3 WX 500 Stormscope 13 SKY497 SkyWatch e TIS from GTX 330 e Ryan 9900B TCAD 190 00357 00 Rev H Appendix C Troubleshooting Q amp A This Appendix is designed to answer some of the common questions regarding the 500W series capa bilities and operation If you have a problem operating the unit read through this appendix and refer to the reference section noted If you don t find answers to your particular question here use the index to find the appropriate section elsewhere in this manual If after reading through the appropriate reference section you still haven t found the answer to your question please see your authorized dealer or contact Garmin directly at the address or phone numbers listed on page ii Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers APPENDIX C Troubleshooting Q amp A What is RAIM and how does it affect approach opera tions RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integ rity Monitoring a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency check on all tracked satellites RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry will allow the receiver to calculate a position within a specified protection limit
116. approach the IAF GLORR a waypoint message Left to 314 in x sec appears on the bottom of the screen As the distance DIS to the IAF approaches zero the message is replaced by a turn advi sory that counts down 10 seconds prior to the turn As you approach the FAF LOTKE the GNS 500W series unit will gradually transition to an angular CDI scale This allows the approach to be flown in an identical fashion to a standard Localizer or ILS approach At 2 0 NM from the FAF CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 NM to the angular full scale deflection typically the angular full scale deflection is 2 0 but will be as defined for the approach As you approach the FAF LOTKE a waypoint alert Next DTK 313 in x sec appears in the lower right corner of the display reminding you to begin the turn 113 5 PROCEDURES LNAV Approach Sixty seconds prior to reaching the FAF LOTKE the unit will check the required Horizontal Alarm Limit HAL and Vertical Alarm Limit VAL to ensure the GPS position integrity is within limits to complete the LPV precision approach In the event the HAL or VAL limits are exceeded the approach will be downgraded to a non precision approach indicated by LNAV on the moving map a message that the approach is downgraded Approach downgraded Use will be flagged You may continue the approach using LNAV non precision minimums if there are LNAV minimums for this approach
117. arances are the sole responsibility of the pilot aS Well as when you re approaching your new target altitude 190 00357 00 Rev H 195 10 VNAV Vertical Navigation Profile To create a vertical navigation profile 1 196 Press VNAV to display the Vertical Navigation Page Press the small right knob to activate the cursor With the Target Altitude field highlighted turn the small and large right knobs to select the target altitude and press ENT Turn the small and large right knobs to select a target altitude The target altitude can be above field elevation for an airport or you can specify an MSL altitude for any waypoint category Turn the small right knob to select Above Wpt AGL or MSL and press ENT Above Wpt uses the altitude of a destination airport as stored on the Jeppesen NavData card MSL lets you set a specific target altitude for any waypoint category airport VOR NDB intersection or user waypoint Turn the small and large right knobs to select a distance from the target reference waypoint and press ENT If the target altitude should occur at the target reference waypoint enter a distance of zero Vertical Navigation Profile Target Altitude b a Lateral Target Position Navigation 6 Turn the small right knob to select Before or After and press ENT This setting desig nates wh
118. area the annunciation TERRAIN i E NOT AVAILABLE is displayed on the TERRAIN Page RATH re K GoL DIS oo Press MSG to continue TER N A ENR TERRAIN has failed message TERRAIN NOT AVAILABLE display 50 190 00357 00 Rev H 2 NAV PAGES Terrain Alerts PopUp Aen TER HZA None TERRAIN not available due to degraded navigation solution or the aircraft is outside of the database coverage area Terrain FLTA advisory generated by predicted or present aircraft altitude being below minimum clearance values Unless there is a change in conditions a TERRAIN AHEAD alert may be generated TERRAIN _ TERRAIN AHEAD Terrain FLTA alert generated by predicted or present aircraft FLASHING FLASHING altitude being below minimum clearance values Obstacle FLTA advisory generated by predicted or present aircraft altitude being below minimum clearance values Unless there is a change in conditions a OBSTACLE AHEAD alert may be generated TERRAIN _ OBSTACLE AHEAD Obstacle FLTA alert generated by predicted or present aircraft FLASHING FLASHING altitude being below minimum clearance values PDA alert when the aircraft is significantly below the normal approach path to the runway TERRAIN Alerts Summary 190 00357 00 Rev H 51 2 NAV PAGES NAVCOM Page NAVCOM Page To select a frequency list for a departure en route The NAVCOM Page provides a list of the airport communication and na
119. ars on this page based upon the same criteria used for airspace alert messages Nearby airspace information and airspace alert messages are provided according to the following conditions If your projected course takes you inside an airspace within the next ten minutes the message Airspace ahead less than 10 minutes appears If you are within two nautical miles of an airspace and your current course is such that it will take you inside that airspace the message Airspace near and ahead appears e If you are within two nautical miles of an airspace and your current course is such that it will not take you inside that airspace the message Near airspace less than 2nm appears If you have entered an airspace the message Inside Airspace appears By default airspace alert messages are turned off When turned on the message MSG annunciator located directly above the MSG key flashes to alert you to the airspace message To view additional information about the airspace select the nearest airspace page Detailed information is available by high lighting the airspace name and pressing ENT To view an airspace alert message 1 Press the MSG key The message page appears with the alert message When an airspace alert occurs the message MSG annunciator flashes at the bottom of the screen Press MSG to view the alert message 2 Press MSG again to return to the previous display
120. as previously described Or use the direct to key to select another destination 1 Press direct to 2 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the destination airport s identifier KFVX 3 Press ENT twice This time you select the GPS runway 21 approach into Farmville Regional The GPS runway 21 approach begins with a holding pattern at the IAF BODRY intersection 4 Press PROC and select the GPS 21 approach 92 190 00357 00 Rev H From the transitions window select BODRY intersection as the IAF assuming that ATC has cleared you direct to the BODRY intersection Also select Activate to load and activate the approach Press PROC and select the GPS 21 ap proach Then select BODRY intersection the IAF from the transitions window Once you activate the approach the Active Flight Plan Page appears You may review the approach sequence by pressing the small right knob and turning the large right knob Press FPL to return to the navigation pages ACTI YE FLIGHT PLAN Once you Activate the approach the Active Flight Plan Page appears showing the sequence of waypoints in the approach 190 00357 00 Rev H 5 PROCEDURES Approach with Hold As in the last example within 31 NM of the airport the 500W series unit switches from en route mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions from 2 0 to 1 0 NM full scale deflection NOTE Upon activating an RNAV GPS appr
121. ata fields leaving room to display only three additional data types Traffic information is only available when the 500W series unit installation includes connection to traffic information sources See the 400W 500W Series Display Interfaces Pilot s Guide Addendum Restoring Factory Settings Restore Defaults resets all five user selectable data fields to their original factory default settings Setup Map Measure Dist Duta Fields Off Change Fields p Restore Defaults Restore Defaults resets all five user se lectable data fields to their original factory settings To restore the factory default settings turn the large right knob to highlight Restore Defaults and press ENT 42 190 00357 00 Rev H Terrain Operation During power up of the 500W Series unit the terrain obstacle database versions are displayed along with a disclaimer At the same time the Terrain system self test begins A failure message is issued if the test fails Garmin TERRAIN is anon TSO C151b certified terrain awareness system provided as a standard feature of 500W Series units to increase situational awareness and help reduce controlled flight into terrain CFIT TAWS is an optional feature on 500W Series units Information on TAWS is provided in the 400W 500W Series Optional Displays Addendum p n 190 00356 30 Operating Criteria TERRAIN requires the following to operate properly e The system must have a valid 3 D
122. ation To calculate density altitude true airspeed winds aloft 1 Select Density Alt TAS Winds trom the Flight Planning Page 2 The flashing cursor highlights the indicated alti tude IND ALT field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the altitude indicated on 190 00357 00 Rev H 171 9 AUX PAGES Flight Planning Use the small and large right knobs to enter the total air temperature TAT TAT is the temperature including the heating effect of speed read on an outside temperature gauge 6 The flashing cursor moves to the aircraft head ing HDG field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the aircraft heading from the directional gyro or compass Press ENT when finished 7 With all variables entered the following infor mation is provided DEN ALT Density altitude TAS True airspeed WIND Wind direction and speed HEAD TAIL WIND Magnitude of head wind or tail wind component NOTE If your installation includes components such as an air data sensor to provide any of the variables above the Density Alt TAS Winds Page data defaults to the values provided by these components To enter a scheduled message 1 Select Scheduler from the Flight Planning Page 2 The flashing cursor highlights the first message field If necessary turn the large right knob to highlight the first blank message field 172 190 00357 00 Rev H Use the small and large right k
123. ation additional entries may be viewed by continu ing to turn the small right knob during the selection process If duplicate entries exist for an entered identi fier a duplicate waypoint page appears once you select the identifier by pressing ENT When selecting a waypoint by facility name or city you can scroll through duplicate entries by continuing to turn the small right knob 6 WPT PAGES Duplicate Waypoints To select a facility name or city location where duplicate entries exist 1 2 Select the desired facility name or location As you spell the facility name or location using the small and large right knobs the 500W series unit Spell N Find feature selects the first entry in the database based upon the characters you have entered up to that point Continue turning the small right knob to scroll through any additional database listings for the selected facility name or location You can scroll backwards with the small right knob if you scroll past the desired facility name or location Press ENT to select the desired facility name or location To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob To select a waypoint identifier from a list of duplicates 190 00357 00 Rev H When selecting a waypoint by identifier a Duplicate Waypoints window may appear allowing you to select desired waypoint by type and region Select the desired airport or navaid identifier A Duplicate Waypoint
124. ations used and available memory USER HAYPOINT LIST 2 Turn the large right knob to select Delete User Waypoint and press ENT Press ENT again to confirm 7 View User Waypoint List Delete User Waypoint To review and or modify a user waypoint from the User Waypoint List Select Delete User Waypoint to delete 1 Select the User Waypoint List the selected waypoint from memory si 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired user waypoint Crossfill allows you to transfer user waypoints 3 Press ENT to display the User Waypoint Page between two 400W 500W series units in a dual for the selected waypoint From this page you ae may review all information defining the way See Section 9 Aux Pages Flight Planning point and its position Crossfill Operation for additional details on using 4 To modify the waypoint s position or reference the Crossfill option waypoint information Keep in mind that you ve already selected a User Waypoint Page which displays the desired user waypoint so you may skip the first two steps of the proce dure example 5 To exit the User Waypoint Page turn the large right knob to highlight Done and press ENT 190 00357 00 Rev H 145 6 WPT PAGES User Waypoint List To rename a user waypoint from the User Waypoint List 1 Select the User Waypoint List 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired user waypoint 3 Use th
125. ayed The default settings are 0 feet or meters for runway length and any for runway surface type Data Field Configuration determines the information type that is displayed in the user selectable data field directly below the VLOC window Available data options are VOR LOC data that displays VOR Localizer information Config Data Fields that allow selection of a nav data item or a traffic watch screen when connected to a traffic sensor The selected data option appears on EVERY page VOR LOC Data Config Data Fields To change the data field configuration 1 Select Data Field Configuration from the Setup 1 Page 2 Turn the small right knob to display the configuration items 3 Turn the small or large right knob to high light the desired item and then press ENT 4 Ifyou selected Contig Data Fields turn the large right knob counter clockwise to high light the data field name 5 The data field name will be highlighted Turn the small right knob to display the data field items 190 00357 00 Rev H 9 AUX PAGES Setup 1 Page 6 Turn the small or large right knob to high 4 To change the altitude buffer turn the large light the desired item and then press ENT right knob to highlight the Altitude Buffer 7 Press the small right CRSR knob twice to field Use the small and large right knobs exit the selection process to enter the desired buffer distance Press ENT l whe
126. be other SBAS selections avail able such as MSAS To enable WAAS operation select the SBAS Selection menu option 2 The flashing cursor highlights the WAAS status selection Turn the small right knob to allow On Off selection 194 190 00357 00 Rev H 10 VNAV Vertical Navigation Page Section 10 Vertical Navigation VNAV The 500W series Vertical Navigation Page allows you to create a three dimensional profile which guides you from your present position and altitude to a final target altitude at a specified location This is helpful when you d like to descend to a certain altitude near an airport Once the profile is defined message alerts eameseaue clerk lets yau knon Whien to and additional data on the Default NAV and Map begin a VNAV descent Pages keep you informed of your progress To display the Vertical Navigation Page press the VNAV key Target Altitude ae ETTET Rt OB e ia Target Distance 11590 T E Ga reference Target Reference Vertical Speed Desired Beain Uescent i Vertical Speed Required VNAV is inhibited in the following conditions i a ae e Groundspeed is less than 35 knots e No active flight plan or direct to destination e SUSP mode e Vectors to Final mode VLOC mode e After the FAF on an approach WARNING VNAV is to be used for advisory purposes only VNAV messages or vertical speed required should not be used to maintain terrain or ATC clearances Terrain and ATC cle
127. blem persists the installation should be checked by your Garmin dealer Not receiving traffic data No traffic data is being received If the problem persists the installation should be checked by your Garmin dealer 190 00357 00 Rev H 203 12 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS NRST key stuck The NRST key is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the NRST key again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact your Garmin dealer for assistance OBS key stuck The OBS key is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the OBS key again to cycle its operation Check for proper operation of both the inter nal and remote keys if present If the message persists contact your Garmin dealer for assistance OBS not available The OBS mode could not be activated because 1 no destination waypoint has been selected or 2 the GPS receiver cannot currently determine its position Obstacle database integrity error The 500W series unit has detected a problem with a database on the TAWS Terrain data card The data is not usable and the card should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service Position outside terrain database coverage region This is supplemental information to explain why TER N A is being annunciated RAIM position warning Although sufficient GPS satellite coverage may exist Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM has determined th
128. both legs 190 00357 00 Rev H 217 APPENDIX C Troubleshooting Q amp A How do I skip a waypoint in an approach departure or arrival The 500W series unit allows you to manually select any approach departure or arrival leg as the active leg of your flight plan This procedure is performed from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the desired way point and pressing the direct to key twice then ENT to approve the selection see illustration left The GPS then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg so ensure that you have clearance to that position See Section 4 Flight Plans Flight Plan Options for more information ACTIVATE LEG NOTE If activating a leg while on the From side sequencing will be suspended as indicated with the SUSP annunciation shown above the OBS key How do fly the GPS with an autopilot and DG head ing bug If you do not have an HSI you should make your course selections on the external CDI s OBS knob and the DG heading bug When does turn anticipation begin and what bank angle is expected The 500W series unit smooths adjacent leg transitions based upon a nominal 15 bank angle with the ability to increase the bank angle up to 30 and provide three pilot cues for turn anticipation 1 A waypoint alert Left or Right to in xx sec flashes in the lower right corner of the screen 10 seconds before the turn point 2 A flashing turn advi
129. bound leg and Left to 210 now appears in the lower right corner of the screen CDI coupling automatically switches from the GPS receiver to the VLOC receiver as you complete the inbound turn If the ILS frequency has not been activated per step 4 this automatic CDI switch does not occur NOTE From this point on primary navigation is provided by the VLOC receiver You may continue to use the GPS receiver for supplemental naviga tion guidance only If automatic CDI switching is disabled Manual selected the reminder mes sage Select VLOC on CDI for approach appears at 2 0 NM prior to the FAF In this instance you must press CDI to manually switch CDI output to the VLOC receiver and continue the approach The GNS 530W automatically switches from the GPS receiver to the VLOC receiver as you complete the turn inbound The annunciator above the CDI key switches from GPS to VLOC As the CDI needle starts to center make a left turn to 210 to track the ILS approach course 190 00357 00 Rev H 5 PROCEDURES ILS Approach As you approach the FAF SHUTR LNAV appears in the lower left corner of the screen indicating a CDI scale transition from TERM to approach scaling This scale transi tion applies only to the Default NAV Page s on screen CDI since the external CDI or HSI is now coupled to the VLOC receiver As you approach the FAF a waypoint alert appears indicating t
130. by pressing the key corresponding to the desired function FPL PROC or VNAV Selecting one of these stand alone page groups in effect exits the main page groups and displays a page for the desired function When pressing the same function key a second time the 500W series unit returns to the main page group and the previously displayed page To select the desired NAV page turn the small right knob until the desired page is displayed If you are currently viewing a page that is not part of the NAV group you can quickly return to the NAV group using the CLR key The number of Nav group pages available varies with installed equipment To select the NAV group and display the Default NAV Page press and hold CLR In addition to the group of NAV pages additional groups of pages are available for waypoint information WPT auxiliary AUX functions such as flight plan ning or unit settings and listings for nearest NRST airports or other facilities 1 To select the desired page group turn the large right knob until a page from the desired group is displayed 2 To select the desired page within the group turn the small right knob until the desired page is displayed 12 190 00357 00 Rev H The bottom right corner of the screen indicates the page group currently being displayed e g NAV or NRST the number of screens available within that group indicated by rectangular icons and the placement of the current screen wi
131. ccssessessessessessesseeaneesees 189 INTRODUCTION CONMCOMMG OE 190 Restoring Factory Settings 0 0 cccccce eee 191 Setup PAC Sich aut echt cdi O 192 SBA O EA 192 Section 10 Vertical Navigation VNAV 193 Section 11 Fault Detection and Exclusion FDE WI NRG Codie cee eee 196 Fault Detection and Exclusion FDE 0 00 0000 0 196 Pre departure Verification of FDE 0 00 196 Section 12 Messages Abbreviations amp Nav TOMS ain 197 Messages esaeo nea ao 197 Turn Advisory and Arrival Annunciations 204 Flight Plan Transfer Messages ccccccees 204 Abbreviations 535 2st cadcvach iets least chatenesededstxesbctaacesecdenns 205 Navigation Terms 209 Appendix A NavData Card Use 0 211 Appendix B Specifications 212 Appendix C Troubleshooting Q amp A 213 UC E E ee 219 190 00357 00 Rev H vil INTRODUCTION Blank Page vill 190 00357 00 Rev H Model Descriptions This guide covers the operation of the GNS 530W GNS 530AW and the GPS 500W In general all models will be referred to as the 500W series except where there are physical or operational differences The 500W series units are 6 25 wide and 4 60 high The display is a 320 by 234 pixel color LCD The units include two removable data cards one with a Jeppesen database inserted in the left most card slot and the second being a Terrain database inserte
132. ces fuel on board figures for planning pur poses Fuel planning figures can be displayed not only for the currently active flight plan or direct to but also point to point between two specified waypoints and for any programmed flight plan Fuel planning figures can be entered and displayed based upon one of three configurations 166 190 00357 00 Rev H e No Fuel Sensors Connected In this instance fuel on board and fuel flow are manually en tered and used to recalculate fuel on board as it is consumed When fuel flow or fuel on board is manually entered the figures are retained the next time you view the page with fuel on board continuously recalculated e Fuel Flow Sensor Installed But No Fuel On Board Sensor Fuel on board is manually entered Fuel flow is automatically provided by sensor If fuel flow is manually entered to override the sensor it does not affect the FOB figure and is not retained the next time you view the page e Fuel Flow and Fuel On Board Sensors Installed Fuel flow and fuel on board are automati cally provided by sensors Fuel on board can NOT be entered manually Fuel Flow can be entered manually but does not affect the FOB figure and is not retained the next time you view the page Trip Planning allows you to view desired track DTK distance DIS estimated time en route ETE en route safe altitude ESA and estimated time of arrival ETA information for a direct to point to
133. course segment which appears in screen above the OBS key magenta on the Map Page 12 As you approach the MAP a waypoint alert Arriving at waypoint appears in the lower right corner CDI scaling continues to tighten from 0 3 NM to 350 feet full scale detlec tion 13 As you cross the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS key indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is sus pended at the MAP A trom indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page but course guidance along the final approach course continues If a missed approach is required use the OBS key to initiate the missed approach sequence as outlined on the follow ing page A NOTE Once you cross the FAF the Map Page displays the final course segment in magenta the active leg of the flight plan always appears in magenta and a dashed line extends the course beyond the missed approach point MAP The dashed line is provided for situational awareness only and should NOT be used for navigation Please follow the published missed approach procedures 90 190 00357 00 Rev H Flying the Missed Approach After you pass the MAP if the runway isn t in sight you must execute a missed approach The 500W series unit continues to give guidance along an extension of the final course segment FAF to MAP until you manually initiate the missed approach procedure as mentioned previously in reference to the SUSP advisory The OBS k
134. ct Sort List By Entry or Sort List By Name and press ENT 179 9 AUX PAGES Utility Page Flight Timers To view use or reset the generic timer 1 2 180 Select Flight Timers from the Utility Page The flashing cursor highlights Start To start the generic timer press ENT You typically begin with this step for count up timers How ever for count down timers you may wish to enter a count direction and time before starting the timer See below To change the count direction turn the large right knob to highlight the count direction field Down or Up Turn the small right knob to select the desired count direction Press ENT when finished For a count down timer turn the large right knob to highlight the time field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the count down time in hours minutes and seconds Press ENT when finished To stop the generic timer turn the large right knob to highlight Stop and press ENT To reset the generic timer turn the large right knob to highlight the time field Press CLR followed by ENT To record or reset the departure time 1 2 190 00357 00 Rev H Select Flight Timers from the Utility Page Turn the large right knob to highlight the reset mode field under Departure Time The reset mode field indicates Pwr on or GS gt 30kt Turn the small right knob to select the desired re
135. ct the desired checklist and press ENT Press MENU to display an options menu Select Edit Item and press ENT then use the small and large right knobs to edit each checklist item Press ENT when finished To insert a checklist step into an existing check list 1 With the Checklists Page displayed turn the large right knob to select the desired checklist and press ENT Turn the large right knobs to highlight the existing checklist entry which immediately fol lows the new checklist step 2 Turn the small and large right knobs to enter the new checklist step Press ENT when finished 190 00357 00 Rev H 9 AUX PAGES Utility Page To delete a checklist or all checklists 1 With the Checklists Page displayed press MENU to display an options menu Turn the large right knob to select Delete Checklist or Delete All Checklists and press ENT to remove the highlighted checklist or all checklists from memory Delete checklist SHORT FLD LNDING Yes a E To copy a checklist 1 With the Checklists Page displayed and the desired checklist selected press MENU to display an options menu Turn the large right knob to select Copy Checklist and press ENT to copy the check list to an empty checklist memory location To sort the checklists by name or entry 1 With the Checklists Page displayed press MENU to display an options menu Turn the large right knob to sele
136. ction until approach for Lynchburg Virginia Regional Airport the approach is Activated KLYH and assumes a departure from Frederick Mary land Municipal Airport KFDK The steps required to set up and fly the approach are detailed below 86 190 00357 00 Rev H 5 PROCEDURES Procedure Turn Approach 1 Prior to departing KFDK the destination KLYH APT is selected using the direct to key or by cre ating a flight plan terminating at Lynchburg Regional 2 While en route to KLYH some 40 50 NM l VECTORS away you select the ATIS frequency to moni gr HURTT tor airport conditions and runway usage This is accomplished by displaying the NAVCOM Activate Page and selecting the ATIS frequency trom the list This places the trequency on standby Use the COM flip flop key to make the ATIS frequency active A second pop up window displays available transitions High light LYH VOR and press ENT Finally select Load to add the approach to the active flight plan 4 f you are cleared direct to the IAF press the PROC key select Activate Approach and press ENT 3 From ATIS you learn that runway 04 is in use and plan your approach accordingly Press the PROC key and select the VOR 04 GPS approach From the transitions window select Flying the Procedure Turn LYH VOR the IAF Also select Load to load 1 Within 31 NM of the destination airport or une k Set are ep pioaa when transitioning to the
137. d follow published missed approach procedures 190 00357 00 Rev H 5 PROCEDURES DME Arc Approach As you near the MAP a waypoint alert Arriv ing at waypoint appears in the lower right corner CDI scaling continues to tighten trom 0 3 NM to 350 feet full scale deflection As you approach the MAP the Arriving at waypoint waypoint alert appears in the lower right corner of the screen As you cross the MAP SUSP appears above the OBS key indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is sus pended at the MAP A trom indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page but course guidance along the final approach course continues If a missed approach is required use the OBS key to initiate the missed approach sequence J3 5 PROCEDURES DME Arc Approach Flying a DME Arc Approach The GPS overlay for a DME arc approach uses additional Jeppesen provided waypoints to define the arc These waypoints are indicated by D as the first letter in the waypoint name This is followed by three numbers indicating the radial the waypoint lies on The last letter indicates the radius of the arc Billard Muni Topeka KS D7 0 VOR Rwy 22 pore 94G KUMGY IAF TOPEKA 117 8 TOP D258G LEBVY DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION A NOTE The letter number DME arc names are being replaced with standard five letter intersec tion names You may encounter either
138. d in the right most card slot GPS 500W The GPS 500W has a WAAS GPS engine and is TSO C146a certified for primary domestic oceanic and remote navigation including en route terminal and non precision approaches and approaches with vertical guidance such as LPV and LNAV VNAV The GPS 500W can simultaneously give aviators vital approach information and weather and traffic data in relation to their position on a large color moving map display Thanks to a high contrast color display the information can be easily read from wide view ing angles even in direct sunlight Its color moving map features a built in database that shows cities highways railroads rivers lakes coastlines and a complete Jeppesen database The Jeppesen database that can be updated with a front loading data card contains all airports VORs NDBs Intersections FSSs Approaches DPs STARs and SUA information Pilots will enjoy the GPS 500W as an MFD espe cially when it is coupled with traffic lightning detec tion and weather interfaces With the PC based FDE prediction program the GPS 500W may be used for oceanic or remote operations For the latest in graphi cal and textual weather information the GPS 500W can connect to XM Satellite Radios XM WX Weather TAKEOFF TOUR Model Descriptions Service via the Garmin GDL 69 69A datalink receiver GNS 530W and GNS 530AW The GNS 530W and GNS 530AW include all of the features of the GPS 500W and
139. d indicates P POS present position If necessary press CLR to display P POS Press ENT and the flashing cursor moves to the to waypoint field Turn the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the to waypoint and press ENT to accept the waypoint OR ee OR 3C 190 00357 00 Rev H For point to point trip planning turn the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the from waypoint Once the waypoint s identifier is entered press ENT to accept the waypoint The flashing cursor moves to the to waypoint Again turn the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the to waypoint and press ENT to accept the waypoint For flight plan leg trip planning turn the small right knob to select the desired flight plan already stored in memory by number Turn the large right knob to highlight the LEG field and turn the small right knob to select the desired leg of the flight plan or select Cum to apply trip planning calculations to the entire flight plan Turn the large right knob to highlight the departure time DEP TIME field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the departure time Press ENT when finished Departure time may be entered in local or UTC time depending upon unit settings If necessary use the small and large right knobs to enter the departure date Press ENT when finished 9 AUX PAGES Flight Plan
140. d radial 190 00357 00 Rev H 6 WPT PAGES Creating User Waypoints NOTE The 500W series units allow you to cre ate a new user waypoint at a defined radial and distance from your present position To reference your present position follow the steps above but press CLR in step 4 PPOS appears in the reference waypoint REF WPT field to indicate that radial and distance information references your present position The second reference waypoint field REF WPT is a temporary reference only not a refer ence that is stored with the user waypoint You may also use this in conjunction with the first reference waypoint to create a position using the intersection of two radials By default this field displays a radial from the nearest VOR However you can select any waypoint by identifier to use as a reference in this field Your 500W series unit can store user defined waypoints which are generated from other equip ment in your panel For example an EFIS equipped with joystick inputs can be used to create user waypoints which if your installation supports this automatically transfer to your 500W series unit The cursor moves to the distance DIS field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the distance trom the reference waypoint to the new user waypoint Press ENT to accept the selected distance Turn the large right knob to highlight Create and press ENT Press the small right knob t
141. d using the flight planning software can be loaded on to a data card via the PC software and then transferred to the 500W Unit using the procedure described below The process can be repeated as many times as desired using the same card with different flight plans and user way points loaded If additional data cards are desired they can be purchased from Garmin separately NOTE Flight plans are not verified by Garmin it is the pilot s responsibility to verify all flight plans Using the Flight Plan Card to load flight plans into the 500W Unit 1 With the unit powered off remove the Terrain Card located in the right slot 2 Place the Flight Plan Card in the empty right slot 3 Apply power to the unit 4 Once initialization has completed the unit will default to the third FPL page this third page only exists when the Flight Plan Card is in use 80 190 00357 00 Rev H Turn the small right knob to select the flight plan file to transfer and catalog number to use Turn the large right knob to move between fields Press ENT to confirm selections and initi ate transfers 4 FLIGHT PLANS NOTE If a user waypoint with the same name already exists in the 500W and is more than 10 meters from the imported user waypoint the imported user waypoint will be automatically renamed by adding a digit 0 9 to the end of the waypoint s name Also a message will appear to inform the user that a waypoint has been ren
142. determine TERRAIN alerts GSL altitude accuracy is affected by factors such as satellite geometry but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude Therefore GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts TERRAIN utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced to mean sea level MSL Using the GPS position and GSL altitude TERRAIN displays a 2 D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the aircraft Furthermore the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircrafts flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles In this manner TERRAIN can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions Detailed alert modes are described later in this section NOTE The data contained in the TERRAIN databases comes from government agencies Garmin accurately processes and cross validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data 190 00357 00 Rev H 43 2 NAV PAGES Terrain Operation Baro Corrected Altitude Baro corrected altitude or indicated altitude is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric conditions The most accurate baro corrected altitude can b
143. ding Fly the outbound course keeping the CDI needle centered Once you have flown approximately one minute past the IAF LYH the alert message Left to 160 in x sec appears in the lower right corner of the screen The unit will sequence to the inbound leg when established inbound NOTE You may manually perform any type of proce dure turn in accordance with the AIM and the charted procedure However the unit displays a map of and provides roll steering for a 45 180 procedure turn If you manually complete the entire procedure turn prior to the unit s initial outbound turn alert software versions prior to 3 20 may sequence to the inbound leg but enter SUSP mode In that case press the OBS key to resume automatic sequencing At approximately one minute past the IAF an alert message Left to 160 in x sec reminds you to begin the procedure 6 turn Turn left to a heading of 160 to initiate the procedure turn Course guidance is provided relative to the outbound leg from the FAF The procedure turn is displayed on the Map Page and indicated as the active leg on the Default NAV and Active Flight Plan pages The CDI needle starts moving to the right DO NOT 9 USE FOR NAVIGATION 10 11 After approximately one minute make a 180 right turn to a heading of 340 to intercept the inbound course The 500W series unit sequences to the inbound leg to the FAF the 190 00357 00 Rev H 5 PR
144. displayed as a solid line The current Map Scale is indicated in the lower left corner and adjustable using the RNG key cs The Map Scale refers tO the distance from the By adding data fields along the bottom to the top of the viewable display right hand side the Map Page can combine a moving map display After the GNS 530W acquires satellites and com and navigation data for complete putes a position the Map Page appears automatically situational awareness Map setup pages are provided to add these data fields and to designate the maximum scale at which each map feature appears These settings provide an automatic decluttering of the map based upon your prefer ences as you adjust the scale Map Display Present Position While viewing the map page you can quickly declutter and remove many of the background map details by pressing the CLR key repeatedly until the desired detail is depicted To change the map scale use the RNG key MAP PAGE To adjust the map scale 1 Press the up arrow on the RNG key to zoom out to a larger area OR 2 Press the down arrow on the RNG key to zoom in to a smaller area 14 190 00357 00 Rev H NAVCOM Page The Navigation Communications NAVCOM Page provides a complete list of airport frequencies at your departure en route and arrival airports A frequency listed on the NAVCOM Page can be quickly transferred to the standby field of the COM or VLOC windows This time sa
145. e Terrain Database Versions The Terrain Data base Versions Page displays the current terrain and obstacle database types version cycle effective date and expiration date Checklists To create a checklist 1 Select Checklist trom the Utility Page Press ENT to display a list of checklists Create New Checklist Delete All Checklists Sort List By Entry Select Create New Checklist to enter a new checklist into memory If the new checklist is similar to a checklist you ve already created you may wish to use the Copy Checklist option and then edit the checklist copy 2 Press MENU to display an options menu Turn the large right knob to select Create New Checklist and press ENT 3 Use the small and large right knobs to enter the name of a checklist Press ENT when fin ished Up to nine different checklists can be created and stored in the 500W series unit 178 190 00357 00 Rev H Use the small and large right knobs to enter each checklist item followed each time by ENT Each checklist may contain up to 30 line items up to sixteen characters in length To execute a checklist 1 With the Checklists Page displayed turn the large right knob to select the desired checklist and press ENT As you complete each checklist item press ENT to move to the next item on the list To edit a checklist 1 With the Checklists Page displayed turn the large right knob to sele
146. e lower left corner of the display indicating the current mode of flight 5 PROCEDURES Basic Approach Operations LPV Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance LPV approach Fly to LPV minimums A yel low background indicates that the approach is safe to continue but a downgrade to LNAV may occur LP Localizer Performance with no vertical guid ance Fly to LP minimums SW V 3 30 or later LIVNAV Lateral Navigation and Vertical Navigation LNAV VNAV approach Fly to LNAV VNAV minimums LNAV V GPS approach using published LNAV minima Advisory vertical guidance is provided LNAV Lateral Navigation approach Fly to LNAV minimums MAPR Missed Approach indicates the system is providing missed approach integrity and CDI full scale deflection 0 3 NM ENR En route CDI full scale deflection is 2 0 NM or current CDI scale selection whichever is smaller TERM Terminal CDI full scale deflection is 1 0 NM or current CDI scale selection whichever is smaller DPRT Departure indicates the system is using non precision approach integrity HAL 0 3 and CDI full scale deflection is 0 3 NM Oceanic CDI full scale deflection is 2 0 NM LOW ALT lower window For LNAV V LNAV VNAV or LPV approaches the LOW ALT annunciation indicates the aircraft s estimated height is lower than the Final Approach Waypoint height by more than the current VPL plus 50 meters This annuncia tion will not be active when TAWS or Terrain
147. e achieved by frequently updating the altimeter setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path However because actual atmosphere conditions seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere ISA model where pressure temperature and lapse rates have fixed values it is common for the baro corrected altitude as read from the altimeter to differ from the GSL altitude This variation results in the aircrafts true altitude differing from the baro corrected altitude Terrain Page To display the Terrain Page select the NAV group and turn the small right knob until the Terrain Page is displayed The page displays terrain information aircraft ground track and GPS derived MSL altitude GSL altitude Altitude is shown in increments of 20 feet or in increments of 10 meters depending on unit configuration For units with TAWS or installed in helicopters or equipped with optional HTAWS refer to 400W 500W Series Garmin Optional Displays P N 190 00356 30 Rev G or later The Terrain Page has two selectable view settings 360 View View from above aircraft depicting surrounding terrain on all sides e 120 View View of terrain ahead of and 60 to either side of the aircraft flight path TERRAIN Page with 360 View NOTE The Terrain Page gives a Track Up display orientation as indicated by the TRK label shown on the display This is the only orientation availab
148. e active flight plan Select Departure Select Departure allows you to select a pub lished standard instrument departure SID for the departure airport or replace the current departure with a new selection When using a direct to the 500W series unit uses the nearest airport as a refer ence when displaying available departures See Section 5 Procedures for information on selecting departures using the PROC key Departures are not available for all airports in which case the departure windows will show NONE To select a departure for the departure airport 1 From the Active Flight Plan Page press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options 2 Highlight the Select Departure option from the Active Flight Plan Page Options and press ENT 3 A window appears listing the available depar tures for your departure airport Turn the small right knob to select the desired departure and press ENT 4 A second window appears listing available transitions for the departure Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired transition waypoint and press ENT 5 A third window appears listing available run ways for the departure Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired runway and press ENT 6 With Load highlighted press ENT The departure is now inserted into your flight plan To remove an approach arrival or departure from the active flight plan 1 Press MENU and turn the larg
149. e aircraft altitude Black TERRAIN Altitude Color Correlation 46 190 00357 00 Rev H 2 NAV PAGES Terrain Operation Database Versions unit front panel The terrain obstacle database may The version and area of coverage of each ter be downloaded via the intenet and the card repro rain obstacle database is shown on the Terrain Data grammed using a USB programmer available trom base Versions Page located in the AUX Page Group Garmin Contact Garmin at 800 800 1020 or at www Databases are checked for integrity at power up Ifa garmin com for more information database is found to be missing and or deficient the To update the terrain or obstacle database Terrain system fails the self test and issues a failure 1 Acquire a new terrain data card from message Garmin 2 Turn off the power to the 500W Series unit 3 Remove the old terrain data card from and insert the new card into the right most slot of the 500W Series unit 4 Turn on the 500W Series unit and verity that the Terrain Database Information Database Updates Terrain Obstacle databases are updated periodi cally with the latest terrain and obstacle data Visit the Garmin website to check for newer versions of terrain obstacle databases Compare database cycle numbers to determine if a newer version is available The database update process includes either reprogramming or replacing the database card and inserting the updated card in the right card slot on the
150. e information from one or more GPS satellites may be in error The resulting GPS position may be in error beyond the limits allowed for your current phase of flight Cross check your position with an alternate navigation source If the warning occurs during a final approach segment FAF to MAP execute the published missed approach Scheduler message 1 9 user entered text The user entered scheduler message time has expired and the scheduler message is displayed Searching the sky The 500W series unit is searching the sky for GPS satellites Select appropriate frequency for approach You are inbound and within 3 NM of the FAF and the active VLOC frequency does not match the published frequency for the approach Tune the standby VLOC frequency to the proper frequency and press the VLOC flip flop key to activate the frequency Select VLOC on CDI for approach GNS 530W only You are inbound and within 3 NM of the FAF and the active approach is not a GPS approved approach Verify that the VLOC receiver is tuned to the proper frequency and press the CDI key to display VLOC directly above the CDI key Set course to The course select for the external CDI or HSI should be set to the specified course The message only occurs when the current selected course differs from the desired track by 10 or greater Steep turn ahead This message appears approximately one minute prior to a turn
151. e large right knob to highlight Mea sure Dist and press ENT An on screen reference pointer appears on the map display at your present position Once Measure Dist is selected place the on screen pointer on the point you wish to measure FROM and press ENT Use the small and large right knobs to place the reference pointer at the location you wish to measure FROM and press ENT Again use the small and large right knobs to place the reference pointer at the location you wish to measure TO The bearing and distance from the first reference location appear at the top of the map display To exit the Measure Dist option press the small right knob Data Fields on the Map The Data Fields On option provides a map display shown at right with five user selectable data fields along the right hand side of the screen Select this option when you wish to display additional on screen data such as destination waypoint name WPT desired track DTK ground track TRK distance to destination DIS and ground speed GS It this option has been selected and the data fields are being displayed Data Fields Off appears as an option instead Data Fields On adds five user selectable data fields to the right hand side of the page Select Change Fields to change any of these fields to a different data type To turn the data fields on or off turn the large right knob to highlight Da
152. e rare event the GPS HAL limits cannot meet non precision limits the 500W series unit will notify the pilot with a message to abort the approach The 500W series unit will revert to terminal limits of 1 0 NM to support naviga tion to the missed approach As you cross the FAF the destination sequences to the MAP With the needle on the external CDI or HSI centered tly toward the MAP observing the altitude minimums dictated by the approach plate 7 When viewing the Map Page you ll note that the tinal course segment is displayed in ma genta the active leg of the flight plan always appears in magenta As you approach the MAP a waypoint message Arriving at Waypoint appears on the bot tom of the screen At the MAP initiate the missed approach if necessary Once the 500W series unit crosses the MAP sequencing will be suspended Pre pare the aircraft for missed approach opera tion Press the OBS key to sequence to the Missed Approach procedure NOTE For missed approaches with heading legs fly manually until the first active course leg is reached as described in earlier sections 10 Fly the guidance provided by the 500W series 190 00357 00 Rev H unit to the MAHP and hold 5 PROCEDURES RNAV Approach Procedures RNAV Approach Procedures The 500W series allows for flying LNAV LNAV VNAV LNAV V LP and LPV approaches according to the published chart HSI Description Annuncia
153. e right knob to select the Remove Approach Remove Arrival or Remove Departure option trom the active flight plan page options and press ENT Copy Flight Plan Invert Flight Plan Delete Flight Plan Select Approach Select Arrival Select Departure Remove Approach Approaches arrivals and departures can all be removed from the active flight plan by selecting the corresponding Remove option To remove an approach arrival or departure from the active flight plan 1 From the Active Flight Plan Page press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options 2 Select the Remove Approach Remove Arrival or Remove Departure option and press ENT 3 Acontirmation window appears listing the pro cedure you are about to remove With Yes highlighted press ENT 190 00357 00 Rev H Closest Point of FPL Closest Point of FPL calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes from a reference waypoint May also be used to create a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the loca tion closest to a chosen reference waypoint To determine the closest point where the ac tive flight plan passes a particular waypoint use the Closest Point of FPL option A waypoint can be added to the flight plan at the calculated location To determine the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint 1 From the Active Fl
154. e small and large right knobs to change the name of the user waypoint Enter the new name directly over the old name Press ENT to accept the new name REPRT Yos iit amr From the User Waypoint List use the small and large right knobs to rename an existing waypoint Press ENT to display a Rename Waypoint confirmation window 4 A Rename Waypoint confirmation window is displayed With Yes highlighted press ENT to rename the selected user waypoint To delete a user waypoint from the User Waypoint List 1 Select the User Waypoint List 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired user waypoint 3 Press CLR to display a Delete Waypoint confirmation window 4 With Yes highlighted press ENT to delete the selected user waypoint mE al not currently used or No With the desired waypoint highlighted on the User Waypoint List press CLR to display a Delete Waypoint window 146 190 00357 00 Rev H To delete all user waypoints from memory 1 Select the User Waypoint List 2 Press MENU to display an options window for the User Waypoint List om All User Waypoints With the User Waypoint List displayed press MENU to display an options window with Delete All User Waypoints highlighted 3 With Delete All User Waypoints highlighted press ENT 4 A Delete all waypoints in user waypoint list confirmation window is displayed Wit
155. ect to followed by ENT twice 62 190 00357 00 Rev H Cancelling Direct To Navigation Once a direct to is activated the unit provides navigation guidance to the selected waypoint until the direct to is manually cancelled or replaced by a new active leg or direct to Cancel Direct To NAY To cancel a direct to select a new direct to waypoint activate a flight plan or select the Cancel Direct To NAV option To cancel a direct to 1 Press the direct to key to display the Select Direct to Waypoint Page Press MENU to display the Direct to Options menu With Cancel Direct To NAV highlighted press ENT If a flight plan is still active the unit resumes navigating the flight plan along the closest leg 3 DIRECT TO Cancelling Manual Course Specifying a Course to a Waypoint When you perform a direct to the unit sets a direct geodetic course to the selected waypoint You can also manually define the course to the selected waypoint using the course field CRS on the Select Direct to Waypoint Page SELECT HAYPOINT Activate The CRS field allows you to define the course to a selected waypoint Use the small and large right knobs to enter the desired course To manually define the course to a waypoint 1 Press the direct to key 2 Use the small and large right knobs to select the desired waypoint 3 Press ENT to confirm the selected waypoint then turn the large ri
156. ected a failure in the built in basemap land data database Land data does not appear on the Map Page Other unit functions continue to work normally however the 500W series unit should be taken to your Garmin dealer for service at your earliest convenience Boot block verify failed Return unit for repair System integrity testing has determined that the boot block has become corrupted Return the unit to your Garmin dealer for service Cannot navigate locked FPL You have attempted to navigate a flight plan FPL with one or more locked waypoints A waypoint can be locked when the NavData card is replaced and the waypoint s does not exist in the new database Can t change an active waypoint An attempt has been made to modify the position of the active to or from waypoint The 500W series unit does not allow modifications to user waypoints currently being utilized for navigation guidance Can t delete an active or FPL waypoint An attempt has been made to delete the active to or from user waypoint The 500W series unit does not allow you to delete user waypoints currently being utilized for naviga tion guidance CDI key stuck The CDI key is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the CDI key again to cycle its operation Check for proper operation of both the internal and remote keys if present If the message persists contact your Garmin dealer for assis
157. ed the 500W series unit uses this for en route and terminal phases and ramps down further during an approach Note that the Horizontal The following items are available CDI Alarms allows you to define the scale for the 500W series unit on screen course deviation Alarm HAL protection limits listed below follow indicator The scale values represent tull scale the selected CDI scale unless corresponding flight deflection for the CDI to either side The default phases call for lower HAL For example if the 1 0 setting is Auto At this setting the CDI scale is NM CDI setting is selected full scale deflection set to 2 0 NM during the en route phase of flight during approach will still follow the approach CDI Within 31 NM of your destination airport the CDI scale settings scale gradually ramps down to 1 0 NM termi nal area Likewise when leaving your departure CDI Scale Horizontal Alarm Limit airport the CDI scale is set to 1 0 NM and gradu T Auto oceanio 200M ally ramps up to 2 NM beyond 30 NM from the aS aN 2 0 NM or Auto en route 2 0NM departure airport During approach operations the CDI scale gradually transitions down to an 1 0 NM or Auto terminal 1 0 NM angular CDI scale At 2 0 NM of the final approach 0 3 NM or Auto 0 3 NM fix FAF CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 to the approach angular full scale deflection typically the angular An auto ILS CDI selection allows the 500W f
158. ed flight plan and select it for navigation guidance back to your original departure point To activate an existing flight plan in reverse order 1 From the Flight Plan Catalog press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan and press MENU to display the Flight Plan Catalog Options 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Invert amp Activate FPL and press ENT The original flight plan remains intact in its Flight Plan Catalog storage location Create New Flight Plan Create New Flight Plan allows you to create a new flight plan The new flight plan will be saved in the Flight Plan Catalog To create a new flight plan 1 Press FPL and turn the small right knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog 2 Press MENU to display the Flight Plan Catalog Options 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Create New Flight Plan and press ENT 190 00357 00 Rev H 67 4 FLIGHT PLANS Copying Deleting 68 6 Create New Flight Plan Delete All Flight Plans Sort List By Number I From the Flight Plan Catalog press MENU to display the options menu and select Create New Flight Plan A blank flight plan page appears for the first empty storage location Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the departure waypoint and press ENT Repeat step 4 above to enter the identifier for each additional flight pl
159. ed procedures associated with them To select an approach departure or arrival 1 Press the PROC key to display the Procedures Page Press the PROC key to display the Procedures Page Options are available to select published approaches arrivals STARs and departures DPs or SIDs 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Select Approach Select Departure or Select Arrival and press ENT 3 A window appears listing the available proce dures Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired procedure and press ENT When a direct to destination is selected departures 5 PROCEDURES Approaches Departures Arrivals are offered for the nearest airport 4 A second window appears listing the avail able transitions Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired transition waypoint and press ENT The approach Vectors option assumes you will receive vectors to the final course segment of the approach and will pro vide navigation guidance relative to the final approach course 133 868 113 88 833 46 1 VECTORS OJC You can select a transition waypoint for an approach or choose VECTORS to provide navigation guidance to the final approach course 5 Turn the large right knob to highlight Load or Activate approaches only and press ENT Load adds the procedure to the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance Thi
160. el Track selection After activating Parallel Track the flight plan will show P for each leg to indicate Parallel Track is active and GPS PTK will be annunciated in the lower left corner Parallel Track offset waypoint Original waypoint Original Present Position After setting a parallel track to your current flight plan a magenta parallel track line will be drawn offset from the original by the se lected distance The original course line will be drawn in white The aircraft will navigate to the parallel track course line 190 00357 00 Rev H To cancel a parallel track to your flight plan 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options window 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Parallel Track and press ENT 3 Cancel is highlighted Press ENT Cancel Activate Change Fields Change Fields allows you to select the desired data items to display on the active flight plan page 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options window 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Change Fields and press ENT The field active for selection will flash Turn the large right knob to highlight the field to change SLT PL aT Piva Changing fields for the active flight plan 3 Turn the small right knob to open the list of selections and continue
161. el flow rate Press ENT when finished Note that if a fuel system is providing current fuel flow the fuel flow defaults to this value The flashing cursor moves to the ground speed GS field Use the small and large right knobs to override the current ground speed and enter a planning figure Press ENT when finished To return ground speed reading to current conditions highlight the ground speed GS field press CLR then press ENT With all variables entered information such as 169 9 AUX PAGES Flight Planning fuel required REQ range RNG and endur ance ENDUR is provided You can change the information displayed on the page by pressing MENU and selecting the Change Fields option If your 500W series unit installation includes connection to fuel sensors additional information items are presented when the Change Fields option is selected To perform trip planning operations i 3a 170 Select Trip Planning from the Flight Planning Page The current trip planning leg mode is dis played at the top of the page POINT TO POINT or FPL LEG for a flight plan leg To change the leg mode press MENU to display an options window for the other leg mode then press ENT to accept the other leg mode Press MENU and use the options window to select the other leg mode Point to Point or Flight Plan For direct to planning verity that the from waypoint fiel
162. en finished i 8 33 kHz and 25 0 kHz channel spacing are available for the GNS 530W s COM trans ceiver Use the 25 0 kHz setting in the United States Preset Com Frequencies On units configured for COM Frequency Presets you may store up to 15 preset Com frequencies in the Com Configuration page On units configured with a remote Com frequency recall switch these preset fre quencies can be loaded into the STBY frequency with the press of a button To store a preset Com frequency 1 Select COM Configuration from the Setup 1 Page 2 The flashing cursor will highlight the Channel Spacing field Turn the large right knob to highlight the lett non decimal part of the first frequency field NOTE Preset Com Frequencies are only available with Main System Software Version 3 00 or later 192 190 00357 00 Rev H 9 AUX PAGES 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired Restoring Factory Settings frequency When making changes to any Setup 1 Page item 4 Turn the large right knob to highlight the right a Restore Defaults menu selection allows you to decimal part of the frequency field restore the original factory settings for the selected COM CORP I GiRAT IO option only For example with the CDI Alarms Page displayed the Restore Defaults option restores the arrival alarm all airspace alarms and CDI settings to the original factory values To restore a Setup 1 Page item to the orig
163. ence datum that may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS known as WGS84 and may be positioned in error as displayed WARNING Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in near or around areas of hazard ous weather Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather conditions WARNING Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link weather product Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather data for data link transmission the weather information shown by the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age CAUTION The Global Positioning System is operated by the United States government which is solely re sponsible for its accuracy and maintenance The system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and performance of all GPS equipment Although the 190 00357 00 Rev H INTRODUCTION Warnings Cautions and Notes Garmin 500W series are precision electronic NAViga tion AIDs NAVAID any NAVAID can be misused or misinterpreted and therefore become unsafe CAUTION Use the 500W series at your own risk To reduce the risk of unsafe operation carefully review and understand all aspects of this Owner s Manual and the Flight Manual Supplement and thoroughly practice basic operation
164. entered previously without having them generate mes sages when the feature isn t needed To disable enable the vertical navigation VNAV messages 1 Press MENU to display the Vertical Navigation Page Options menu 2 With VNAV Messages On highlighted press ENT Or if the messages are already on and you wish to turn them off make sure VNAV Messages Off is highlighted and press VSR is displayed on the Vertical Navigation Page ENT Expect the following to occur when using the vertical navigation feature e At one minute prior to reaching the initial descent point a message Approaching VNAV Profile occurs The descent angle also locks to prevent changes in speed from altering the profile If selected the vertical speed required VSR readout on the default NAV and map pages shows the desired vertical speed to maintain the proper descent angle Maximum VSR that can be displayed is 6000 ft min If VSR exceeds 6000 ft min dashes will be displayed e Course reversals are not included in the VNAV calculations until the aircraft begins the course reversal While reversing course VNAV includes direct to the course reversal wayopint in the VNAV Messages On Restore Defaults VNAV I Select VNAV Messages On to display the vertical navigation alert message To restore the factory default VNAV settings 1 Press MENU to display the Vertical Navigation Page Options menu 2 Turn the la
165. entifier field highlighted SELECT P HAYPOINT Pressing the direct to key displays the Select Direct to Waypoint Page Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the desired direct to waypoint 3 DIRECT TO Selecting a Waypoint SELECT P HAYPOINT Activate Use the small and large right knobs to enter the name of the direct to waypoint Press ENT once the name has been fully entered Press ENT to contirm the selected waypoint and ENT again to activate the direct to func tion If you re navigating to a waypoint and get off course the direct to function may also be used to re center the CDI HSI needle and proceed direct to the active waypoint To re center the CDI HSI needle to the active waypoint 1 190 00357 00 Rev H Press the direct to key followed by ENT twice NOTE When navigating an approach with the missed approach point MAP as the active way point re centering the CDI HSI needle with the direct to key cancels the approach 59 3 DIRECT TO Selecting by Facility or City Selecting a Direct To Waypoint by Facility 2 Name or City In addition to selecting a direct to waypoint by identifier the Select Direct to Waypoint Page also allows you to select airports VORs and NDBs by facil ity name or city location If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or city additional entries may be viewed by continuing to turn the small right knob
166. equency 127 Location 124 Nearest 152 Runway 125 Airspace 36 157 197 200 Alert 20 Frequencies 37 Airspace alert 185 Alarms 182 185 ALT 55 167 170 171 205 209 Altitude i 20 31 32 41 44 46 53 54 56 89 94 98 102 103 104 115 187 Altitude butter 160 183 185 Altitude input 105 201 Annunciations 48 57 85 129 204 Approach 17 72 83 197 201 216 Activate 84 Airport 129 Channel 131 DME arc 96 Hold 92 ILS 107 Localizer 118 APPENDIX D Index LPV 113 Missed approach 91 Procedure turn 86 VTF 100 ARINC 201 212 Arrival 17 73 83 132 186 197 216 ARTCC 18 26 149 150 155 205 Auto tuning 24 25 162 Automatic CDI switching 118 Automatic operation 173 Autopilot 86 92 97 108 117 119 120 216 Auto zoom 33 34 39 Aux pages 165 Flight planning 166 Flight timer 178 Setup 1 181 Setup 2 192 Utility 175 Backcourse 118 Backlight 184 188 198 199 Bank angle 202 216 Barometric pressure 167 171 187 Basemap 198 201 Basic approach operation 85 Bearing indicator 13 C Catalog 21 65 67 72 Cautions 48 49 160 185 CDI 4 59 164 182 185 198 216 Ceiling 20 36 158 159 160 185 Channel spacing 181 185 190 Checklists 7 175 176 City 39 60 122 124 137 138 Clear 3 CLR 3 12 14 Com 2 23 198 212 Tuning 24 Window 24 Comment 66 70 Com configuration 185 190 190 00357 00 Rev H 221 APPENDIX D Index Controlled airspace 20 34 36 150 1
167. er first checking antenna connections or for a short in the antenna GPS needs service The 500W series unit has detected a failure in its GPS receiver The GPS receiver may still be usable but the unit should be returned at your earliest convenience to your Garmin dealer for service GTN transfer canceled version mismatch The GNS and GTN units are using different Navigation Database cycles GTN flight plan not supported The GTN active flight plan contains a waypoint that is not recognized by the GNS e g GTN has a European waypoint and the GNS Navigation Database is North America only Inside airspace Your GPS calculated position lies within the boundaries of a special use airspace This mes sage is automatically disabled within 30 NM of an arrival airport when an approach is loaded 202 190 00357 00 Rev H Insufficient Terrain Database Resolution The installed terrain database does not have sufficient resolution to support HIAWS Invalid closest pt of FPL A closest point cannot be created from the waypoint entered on the Closest point of flight plan window This occurs when the selected way point is beyond the limits of all legs in the flight plan too far away or when a unique waypoint name for the closest point cannot be created Invalid FPL modification An attempt was made to modify the final course segment FAF to MAP of an instru ment approach The 500W series unit does not allow the
168. ether the offset distance defines a point before you reach the target reterence waypoint or after you reach the waypoint The After selection is not available for the last waypoint Turn the small right knob to select whether the distance is Before or After the refer ence waypoint 7 When using a flight plan the target refer ence waypoint itself can be specified from the waypoints contained in the flight plan By default the last waypoint in the flight plan is selected To select a different waypoint turn the small right knob to select the desired waypoint and press ENT 190 00357 00 Rev H 8 The default profile utilizes a 400 foot per minute descent rate To change the rate turn the large right knob to highlight the VS Profile field and use the small and large right knobs to enter a new rate Press ENT when finished The default profile is a 400 foot per minute descent Use the small and large right knobs to enter a different vertical speed figure With the profile set the vertical speed required 10 VNAV VNAV Messages VNAV calculation e At 500 feet above the target altitude an Approaching Target Altitude message is pro vided The VSR readout on the Default NAV and Map Pages is blanked out at this point Vertical navigation messages can be turned on or off By default the messages are off Turning the mes sages olf allows you to keep the profile settings you ve
169. eve a frequency list for ANY airport in the Jeppesen NavData database Press the small right knob to place the cursor on the airport identifier field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the desired airport Press ENT when finished Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired frequency Press ENT to place the highlighted frequency in the standby COM window field 27 Auto Tuning from Flight Plan Emergency Channel Stuck Mic 1 COM GNS 530W only Emergency Channel The GNS 530W s emergency channel select pro vides a quick method of selecting 121 500 MHz as the active frequency in the event of an in flight emergency The emergency channel select is available whenever the unit is on regardless of GPS or cursor status or loss of the display 118 980 DEPARTURE 113 88 E Press and hold the COM flip flop key for two seconds to activate the 121 500 MHz emergency frequency To quickly tune and activate 121 500 press and hold the COM or remote flip flop key for approximately two seconds If the remote key is used further changes in COM frequency will not be possible without recycling power NOTE Under some circumstances if the com system loses communication with the main system the radio will automatically tune to 121 500 MHz for transmit and receive regardless of the displayed frequency Stuck Microphone Whenever the GNS 530W is transmitting a TX
170. ey is used to initiate the missed approach as follows 1 NOTE It is the pilot s responsibility for initial missed approach guidance in accordance with published procedure The unit may not provide correct guidance until established on a defined leg DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION After commencing the published missed approach procedure and after the SUSP annunciator has appeared press the OBS key to sequence to the first waypoint in the missed approach procedure This will simultaneously result in several changes a SUSP annunciation will extinguish b The first waypoint in the missed approach procedure will be sequenced c The current approach annunciation LPV 190 00357 00 Rev H 5 PROCEDURES Approach with Hold L NAV LNAV V or LNAV will be replaced with either MAPR or TERM depending on the design of the approach Normally MAPR will be annunciated for missed approach procedures in which the first leg is a climb straight ahead to a waypoint whereas TERM will be annunciated for missed approach procedures requiring a turn d CDI scaling will change to 0 3 NM full scale deflection if MAPR is annunciated or 1 0 NM if TERM is annunciated e The FROM indicator will change to a TO indication NOTE In some cases an additional hold waypoint is added to the missed approach sequence This ad ditional waypoint is used as an aid in establishing the holding pattern especially w
171. fer is set at 500 feet and you are more than 500 feet above or below an airspace you 9 AUX PAGES Setup 1 Page will not be notified with an alert message if you are less than 500 feet above or below an airspace and projected to enter it you will be notified with an alert message The default setting is 200 feet Units Position allows you to configure the displayed data to standard or metric units of mea sure This setting applies to distance speed alti tude fuel pressure and temperature Also provided are three variation heading options Magnetic True and User If Magnetic is selected all track course and heading information is corrected to the magnetic variation computed by the GPS receiver The True setting references all information to true north The User selection allows the pilot to enter values between 0 and 179 E or W Metric km kph Statute mi mph Use the Units Position Page to switch distance and speed measurements between Nautical Statute and Metric units Configuration settings for position format and map datum are also provided Position formats include latitude longitude MGRS and UTM UPS The NavData card uses the WGS 84 map datum to conform to WAAS requirements Date Time provides settings for time format local or UTC 12 or 24 hour and time offset The time offset is used to define current local time UTC also called GMT or zulu
172. ferred to the active frequency by pressing the COM flip flop key 24 190 00357 00 Rev H ARRIVAL 125 475 Once the standby frequency is selected use the COM flip flop key to make the frequency active for transmit and receive operations NOTE The tuning cursor normally appears in the COM window unless placed in the VLOC window by pressing the small left knob When the tuning cursor is in the VLOC window it automatically returns to the COM window after 30 seconds of inactivity The active frequency in either window cannot be accessed directly only the standby frequency is highlighted by the tuning cursor GNS 530W only To select a COM frequency 1 Ifthe tuning cursor is not currently in the COM tarily 2 Turn the large left knob to select the desired megahertz MHz value For example the 118 portion of the frequency 118 300 3 Turn the small left knob to select the desired kilohertz kHz value For example the 300 portion of the frequency 118 300 To make the standby frequency the active fre quency press the COM flip flop key The tuning cursor remains in the COM window If you wish to select a VOR ocalizer ILS frequency press the small left knob momentarily to place the cursor in the VLOC window Additional instructions for VOR localizer ILS operations are available in Sections 5 and 8 DEPARTURE 118 980 Cursor in VLOC window allows for VOR and ILS operations Auto Tuni
173. ge described later in this section The Map Page also displays a background map showing lakes rivers coastlines highways railways and towns When a map scale is selected below the lower limit at which the map detail was originally created an overzoom indication appears on the map display below the scale reading Overzoom indicates that the detail at this scale may not accurately repre sent actual conditions and extra caution should be observed when these scales are used for navigation The Setup Map option allows you to define the maximum scale at which each map feature appears This provides you with complete control to minimize screen clutter You can also quickly remove items from the map using the CLR key 34 190 00357 00 Rev H 2 NAV PAGES Map Panning To quickly declutter the map display press the CLR key momentarily as often as needed to select the desired amount of map detail 113 98 118 700 15 CHIKO 11300 158 2 2m 113 98 GEENO KUGH ae KENIL Dav 12 2n z NAY ME SR L Panning the map lets you look beyond the boundaries of the current map area without changing the scale Start by pressing the small right knob NAV To quickly declutter the map press CLR Continue pressing CLR to select the desired declutter level Note the scale is followed 1 2 or 3 To select the panning function and pan the map display peciiter Level 1 Press the small right
174. ght knob to activate the cursor B 5 Press ENT to accept the selected position 2 Use the small and large right knobs to enter 140 a name for the new waypoint and press ENT Your present position appears in the position field at the bottom of the page To create a waypoint at your present position turn the large right knob to highlight Create and Skip to step 6 190 00357 00 Rev H The cursor moves to Create Press ENT to add the new waypoint to memory Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor To create a new user waypoint by referencing an existing waypoint 1 With the User Waypoint Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the cursor Use the small and large right knobs to enter a name for the new waypoint and press ENT Turn the large right knob to highlight the first reference waypoint REF WPT field Create Use the small and large right knobs to enter the name of the reference waypoint Press ENT and the cursor moves to the 4 radial RAD field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identitier of the reference waypoint The reference waypoint can be an airport VOR NDB intersection or another user waypoint Press ENT to accept the selected identitier The cursor moves to the radial RAD field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the radial from the reference waypoint to the new user waypoint Press ENT to accept the selecte
175. ght knob to highlight the course CRS field 4 Turn the small and large right knobs to select the desired course and press ENT 5 Press ENT again to begin navigation using the selected waypoint and course 190 00357 00 Rev H 63 3 DIRECT TO Selecting Direct To a Holding Pattern 4 You may select a Direct To course to a holding pat tern that is in your flight plan To set a direct to course to a holding pattern 1 Press the FPL key to reach the active flight plan page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor Turn the large right knob to highlight the hold leg of the flight plan ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAH 3 Press direct to Activate will be highlighted Press ENT to activate a course Direct To the holding pattern Or press CLR to cancel the process ACTIVATE LEG 64 190 00357 00 Rev H The holding waypoint will now be set as the direct to waypoint 4 FLIGHT PLANS Creating Flight Plans Section 4 Flight Plans The 500W series unit lets you create up to 20 differ ent flight plans with up to 100 waypoints in each flight plan The flight plan FPL page group consists of two pages accessed by pressing the FPL key The flight plan pages allow you to create edit and copy flight plans 0S ee i bh H bh Highlight the point in the existing flight plan where you wish to add the new waypoint If an existing waypoint is highlighted the new waypoint is placed directly in front of
176. ght knob to select the appropriate Group name per the chart on the previous page and press ENT Use the large right knob to highlight the RNG field for the desired feature and turn the small right knob to select the maximum scale at which the fea ture should appear on screen Or select Off to never display the selected feature Press ENT to accept the selected option Next turn the large right knob to highlight the TEXT field for the desired feature and turn the small right knob to select the desired text size or select Ott to disable text descriptions Press ENT to accept the selected option For airspace boundaries highways roads railroad lines active flight plan course lines and lat long grid lines Turn the small right knob to select the appropriate Group name per the chart on the previous page and press ENT Use the large right knob to highlight the RNG field for the desired feature and turn the small right knob to select the maximum scale at which the feature should appear on screen Or select Off to never display the selected feature Press ENT to accept the selected option Distance Measurements The Measure Dist option provides a quick easy method for determining the bearing and distance between any two points on the map display To measure bearing and distance between two points 1 2 190 00357 00 Rev H Press MENU with the Map Page displayed Turn th
177. ginal course North Course Parallel Track Distance A Offeet t i FROM WPT 190 00357 00 Rev H 75 4 FLIGHT PLANS Active Flight Plan Options 76 Points to remember with Parallel Track e You must have an active flight plan e The current leg must support parallel track e Parallel track is not allowed for the active leg of an approach e Parallel track is not allowed if the active leg is not a track to fix or direct to fix leg e Parallel track may be allowed but not the selected offset distance To set a parallel track to your flight plan 1 With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options window Copy Flight Plan Invert Flight Plan Delete Flight Plan Select Approach Select Arrival Select Departure Closest Point of FPL Parallel Track Select Parallel Track to set a parallel track to your current flight plan 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Parallel Track and press ENT 3 Turn the small and large right knobs to set the Offset Distance value and then press ENT Activate 4 Turn the large right knob to highlight the Offset Direction flight plan m 7 course line 5 Turn the small right knob to select the desired Offset Direction and press ENT 6 Activate is highlighted Press ENT to activate the selected Parallel Track Or press CLR or the small right knob CRSR to cancel Parall
178. h Yes highlighted press ENT to delete all user waypoints trom memory user waypoint list f or No A Delete all waypoints in user waypoint list confirmation window allows you to verify your intent to remove ALL user waypoints from memory 190 00357 00 Rev H 6 WPT PAGES User Waypoint List 147 6 WPT PAGES Blank Page 148 190 00357 00 Rev H 7 NRST PAGES NRST Page Group Section 7 NRST Pages NRST Page Group Section 2 introduced the 500W series unit main page groups NAV WPT AUX NRST and described each page in the NAV group This fourth page group NRST provides detailed information for the 25 nearest airports VORs NDBs intersections and user waypoints within 200 NM of your current position In addition the NRST pages include the five nearest Flight Service Station FSS and center ARTCC FIR points of communica tion and alert you to any Special Use SUA or Controlled Airspace you may be in or near NAV WPT AUX NRST 5 available pages 10 available pages 4 available pages 8 available pages see Section 2 see Section 6 see Section 9 see list below Nearest Airport Nearest ARTCC Nearest Flight Service In the GPS 500W press NRST In the GNS 530W to display one of the NRST pages start from any main page or press and hold CLR to display the Default NAV Page then turn the large right knob to select the NRST page group as indicated by
179. h NOTE Since this is not a GPS approach the pilot should be using the VLOC receiver tuned to the correct VOR TOP for navigation However as an example operation is essentially identical GPS guidance is for monitoring only Load approach Yes E i As you approach the IAF D258G LEBVY a waypoint alert Left to 353 in x sec appears in the lower right corner of the screen As the distance DIS to the IAF approaches zero the alert is replaced by a turn advisory Turn to 353 now Follow the arc keeping the CDI needle cen tered When using an autopilot the course select on the CDI or HSI must be periodically updated with the desired track DTK to ensure proper tracking through the arc Whenever the course select setting and desired track differ by more than 10 a Set course to mes Sage appears on the Message Page 123 800 ied TOP 315 7 0 As you fly the DME arc Set Course to alerts you to periodically adjust the course select on the external CDI or HSI 97 5 PROCEDURES Vectors To Final Approach 7 The next point in the approach is an interme diate tix labeled DO25G DMARY As you approach this intermediate fix a waypoint alert Right to 205 in x sec appears in the lower right corner of the screen As the distance to this fix approaches zero the alert is replaced by a turn advisory Right to 205 now Dial this cour
180. hat Next DTK 210 in X Sec Also as you approach SHUTR a waypoint alert Next DTK 210 in x sec appears in the lower right corner of the screen As you cross SHUTR the destination sequences to the MAP RW21 the runway threshold With the needle on the external CDI or HSI centered tly toward the MAP observing the altitude minimums dictated by the approach plate NOTE When viewing the Map Page you ll note that the final course segment is displayed in magenta the active leg of the flight plan always appears in magenta and a dashed line extends the course beyond the MAP 111 5 PROCEDURES LPV Approach DO NOT USE FOR is displayed on the Default NAV Page but NAVIGATION course guidance along the final approach course continues Do NOT follow this extended course Follow published missed approach procedures using the OBS key to initiate the missed approach sequence FLAGSTAFF pee EG As you cross the MAP SUSP appears above PULLIAM the OBS key To execute the missed approach R press OBS and follow the published missed approach procedures 14 As you approach the MAP a waypoint alert A NOTE In addition to using the OBS key to initi Arriving at waypoint appears in the lower ate the missed approach sequence you may wish right corner to press the CDI key to manually switch external CDI output to the GPS receiver GPS is indi cated above
181. he CDI key When the external CDI or HSI is being driven by the VLOC receiver VLOC appears instead 123 775 7 11780 ME iy 25 CROW EHG LL To couple the external CDI or HSI to the GPS receiver or VLOC receiver press the CDI key to display GPS or VLOC as desired A NOTE The external CDI or HSI must be coupled to the VLOC receiver for approaches which are not approved for GPS See ILS example in the Procedures section for more information NOTE GPS level of service annunciations LPV ENR etc are not applicable to the external CDI or HSI when VLOC is active 190 00357 00 Rev H 9 AUX PAGES AUX Page Group Section 9 To quickly select an AUX page AUX Pages 1 From any page press and hold CLR to select AUX Page Group the Default NAV Page You may skip this step Section 2 introduced the 500W series unit main if you are already viewing any of the main page groups NAV WPT AUX NRST and pages described each page in the NAV group The third 2 Turn the large right knob to select the AUX page group AUX allows you to change unit settings page group AUX appears in the lower right customizing operation to your preferences The AUX corner of the screen pages also provide E6B functions such as trip plan ACU ASD DIENT ning fuel planning density altitude true airspeed and winds aloft calculations on 3 Turnthe small right knob to select the desired
182. he GNS 530W built in VLOC VOR ocalizer glideslope receivers The GPS receiver can be used for 5 PROCEDURES GNS 530W only ILS Approach H 1 21m JJ1 21m Once cleared to the next leg press OBS An alert appears indicating the desired track and the unit sequences to the next waypoint guidance prior to reaching the final approach fix but once there the proper frequency must be selected on the VLOC window left side of screen and the CDI output set to VLOC 124 500 The GNS 530W can be set to automatically switch the external CDI output from GPS to VLOC as you 11050 5 intercept the final approach course if used with a SHEP KAP140 KFC225 autopilot you will need to manually E E UMARE enable outputs See instructions at the end of this sec tion When the ILS approach is activated and the cor rect ILS frequency is active in the VLOC window the GNS 530W automatically switches within 1 2 NM left or right of the final approach course This switch can oe take place anywhere from 2 0 to 15 0 NM from the FAF receiver to guide you on the initial portion of an ILS approach At this stage GPS is The illustration above shows both multiple loca indicated above the CDI key tions along the approach path and the CDI selection that you can expect GPS or VLOC Within the area The GNS 530W can use its internal GPS NOTE GPS level of service annunciations LPV ENR of the shaded box the automatic switch from G
183. he best accuracy and the highest numbers are worse EPU is the horizontal position error estimated by the Fault Detection and Exclusion FDE algorithm in feet or meters 56 190 00357 00 Rev H Dead Reckoning Dead reckoning is the process of continuing navi gation using your last known position and speed after a loss of GPS navigation while on an active flight plan Dead reckoning becomes active after a loss of GPS position while you are navigating using an active flight plan A pop up message will appear and you must clear the message before continuing operation fore only an estimate and should not be used as the sole means of navigation Use other means of naviga tion if possible LOSS OF GPS HAYIGATIOH USE OTHER HAY IF AVAILABLE The ownship icon color is changed to yellow The To From flag is removed from the CDI The Dead Reckon ing annunciator DR appears on the left side of the map display when GPS position is unavailable and the unit is in Dead Reckoning mode All external outputs dependent on GPS position are flagged Terrain will be noted as not available and new terrain advisory pop ops will not occur Traffic and Storm scope information will not be shown on the Map page but will continue to be available on their own dedi cated pages XM or FIS B weather will still be available on the Map page CAUTION Navigation using dead reckoning is there 2 NAV PAGES Dead Reckoning Dead Reckoning
184. hen finished 5 To reset the total trip time turn the large right knob to highlight Reset and press ENT 9 AUX PAGES Setup 1 Page Trip Statistics To reset trip statistics readouts 1 Select Trip Statistics from the Utility Page 2 Press MENU to display an options window with several reset options Reset Max Speed Reset Odometer Reset All Press MENU to display an options window listing several reset options Reset Trip Resets trip odometer and average ground speed readouts Reset Max Speed Resets maximum speed readout only e Reset Odometer Resets odometer readout only Reset All Resets all trip statistics readouts 3 Turn the large right knob to select the desired reset option and press ENT 190 00357 00 Rev H 181 9 AUX PAGES Setup 1 Page RAIM Prediction To predict RAIM availability 1 182 Select RAIM Prediction from the utility page The flashing cursor highlights the waypoint field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the waypoint at which you wish to determine RAIM availability Press ENT when finished To determine RAIM avail ability for your present position press CLR followed by ENT The flashing cursor moves to the arrival date field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the date for which you wish to determine RAIM availability Press ENT when finished The flashing cursor moves
185. here the MAP and MAHP are the same waypoint An alert message in the lower right hand corner of the screen recommends entry procedures for the holding pattern As you fly the holding pat tern the timer in the lower right corner of the Default NAV Page automatically resets on the outbound side of the hold when you are abeam the hold waypoint The timer again resets as you turn inbound within approximately 30 of the inbound course This allows you to use standard timing typically one minute to fly the inbound and outbound legs of the hold NOTE Time is displayed for standard time based holding patterns Holding patterns that have a published leg length will display the distance a 5 PROCEDURES Approach with Hold Flying an Approach with a Hold Starting where the previous example left off we ll assume weather conditions resulted in a missed approach at Lynchburg Regional Now you ve decided to divert to Farmville Regional KFVX instead An alert message in the lower right hand corner recommends entry procedures for the holding pattern 3 The 500W series unit provides course guid ance only on the inbound side of the holding pattern Roll steering is provided to aircraft with compatible autopilots When leaving the holding pattern to re fly the approach Farmville VA le or another approach press the PROC key to Dau Select Approach or Activate Approach ro DO NOT USE FOR ae NAVIGATION
186. his equipment does cause harmful interference the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by relocating the equipment or connecting the equipment to a different circuit than the affected equipment Consult an authorized dealer or other qualified avionics technician for additional help if these remedies do not correct the problem Operation of this device is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Garmin is fully committed to your satisfaction as a customer If you have any questions regarding the 500W series please contact our customer service department at Garmin International Inc 1200 East 151st Street Olathe KS 66062 3426 U S A Phone 913 397 8200 Fax 913 397 8282 NOTE The GNS 500W series units use a different incompatible between units The GNS 500W series units NOTE This product its packaging and its components NOTE Canadian installations In accordance with NOTE It is the pilot s responsibility for initial missed approach guidance in accordance with published pro cedure The unit may not provide correct guidance until established on a defined leg NOTE GPS level of service annunciations LPV ENR etc are not applicable to the external CDI or HS when VLOC is active NOTE Do not rely solely upon data link services to
187. hlight the desired frequency and press ENT Press the VLOC flip flop key to activate the frequency 5 Press the VLOC flip flop key to activate the selected frequency 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor To view additional information for a nearby VOR 1 Select the Nearest VOR Page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the identifier of the desired VOR 4 Press ENT to display the VOR page for the selected VOR UJ 154 190 00357 00 Rev H 7 NRST PAGES Nearest User WPT and ARTCC ARTCC Name Frequency s ELPEEF HETEC Bearing To and Distance To Sixth Page in H NRST Group To quickly tune an ARTCC s frequency from the To view additional information for a nearby VOR highlight the desired VOR on the list ang press BANT Nearest Center Page GNS 530W only 5 To return to the Nearest VOR Page verify that 1 Select the Nearest Center Page Done is highlighted by the flashing cursor l and press ENT or press CLR 2 Press the small right knob to activate the i cursor 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor 3 Turn the small right knob to scroll through the list selecting the desired ARTCC Nearest User Waypoint Page BEAR ES OET E The Nearest User Waypoint Page displays the name bearing and distance to the 25 nearest user way points within 200 NM of
188. hown in this example All airspace alert messages except for prohibited areas may be turned on or off from the Airspace Alarms Page See Sec 9 Aux Setup 1 CDI Alarms for more information An altitude buffer is also pro vided on the Airspace Alarms Page to provide an extra margin of safety above below the published limits 160 190 00357 00 Rev H 8 VLOC RECEIVER GNS 530W only Ident Audio and Volume VLOC Tuning Section 8 VLOC Tuning Window VLOC VOR Localizer Glideslope VLOC frequencies are selected with the tuning Receiver Operations cursor in the standby VLOC frequency field and using the small and large left knobs to dial in the desired frequency The standby frequency always appears below the active frequency The active frequency is the frequency currently in use The GNS 530W includes digitally tuned VOR localizer and glideslope receivers with the desired frequency selected on the VLOC window along the left hand side of the display Frequency selection is performed by pressing the small left knob and a NOTES Thewuiing cise e E turning the small and large left knobs to select the COM window unless placed in the VLOC window desired frequency by pressing the small left knob When the tuning Ident Audio and Vol cursor is in the VLOC window it automatically wwe oo returns to the COM window after 30 seconds of 1 17 95 inactivity Standby VLOC ident is enabled lt Frequency by pressing the VLOC The
189. i ameb p mase Runway Des ignations Runway Length and Width Runway Surface Lighting Avail ability i Second Page in WPT ae To display information for each additional runway 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the Runway designation field 190 00357 00 Rev H 125 6 WPT PAGES Airport Runways Airport Runway Page Options 3 Turn the small right knob to display a window Select Next FPL Apt listing all runways for the selected airport 4 Continue turning the small right knob to As described earlier in this section select the desired runway Select Destination Apt 5 Press ENT to display information for the As described earlier in this section selected runway on the Airport Runway Page To adjust the scale of the map image 1 Press the down arrow side of the RNG key to display a smaller map area 2 Press the up arrow side of the RNG key to display a larger map area The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Runway Page e Type Usage type Public Military Heliport or Private 6 To remove the flashing cursor press the small e Surface Runway surface types include Hard right knob Turf Sealed Gravel Dirt Soft Unknown or Water Lighting Runway lighting types include No Lights Part Time Full Time Unknown or Fre quency for pilot controlled lighting 126
190. ice The GDL 88 is reporting that the external traffic system has a low battery TERRAIN configuration conflict The current TAWS Terrain configuration is not supported by the hardware The TAWS hardware may have failed or the unit may be misconfigured The units terrain capabilities will be downgraded to Terrain instead of TAWS Contact your Garmin dealer for service TERRAIN configuration has changed The unit ter rain TAWS settings have changed since it was last turned on in normal mode Contact your Garmin dealer for service Terrain database integrity error The 500W series unit has detected a problem with a database on the TAWS Ter rain data card The data is not usable and the card should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service TERRAIN has failed The unit has detected a failure in the terrain system The most likely cause is a missing or corrupt Terrain database Terrain functionality is not available If the Terrain database is not the cause the unit should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service Timer has expired The count down timer has reached zero Traffic device has failed The 500W series unit cannot communicate with the SKY497 or TCAD and or the SKY497 or TCAD is reporting a system failure Traffic device needs service the traffic device is report ing a system failure The unit may still be usable but should be returned at your earliest convenience to your
191. ies unit direct to function to quickly set a course to a nearby facility This feature can be a real time saver compared to retrieving information from the database using the WPT pages More importantly it instantly provides navigation to the nearest airport in case of an in flight emergency To select a nearby airport VOR NDB intersection or user waypoint as a direct to destination To scroll through the ARTCC or FSS frequen 1 Use the flashing cursor to scroll through a NRST page list and highlight the desired nearest waypoint HEAREST AIRPORT You can select a direct to destination direct ly from a NRST page e g Nearest Airports by highlighting the desired waypoint and pressing the direct to key Press the direct to key to display the Select Direct to Waypoint Page Press ENT to accept the selected waypoint s identifier and press ENT a second time with Activate highlighted to begin navigating to the selected waypoint 151 7 NRST PAGES Nearest Airports Nearest Airport Page The Nearest Airport Page displays the identifier symbol bearing and distance to the 25 nearest airports within 200 NM of your present position For each airport listed the Nearest Airport Page also indicates the best available approach common traffic advi sory frequency CTAF and the length of the longest 2 runway The Nearest Airport Page can be configured to exclude shorter runways or undesirable runway
192. ight Plan Page press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options 2 Select the Closest Point of FPL option from the Active Flight Plan Page Options and press ENT 3 Awindow appears with the reference waypoint field highlighted Use the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the refer ence waypoint and press ENT 4 The 500W series unit displays the bearing BRG and distance DIST to the closest point along the flight plan from the selected refer ence waypoint To create a user waypoint at this location and add it to the flight plan 4 FLIGHT PLANS Active Flight Plan Options highlight Load and press ENT The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference waypoint Parallel Track Parallel Track allows you to create a parallel course offset of 1 to 99 NM to the left or right of your current flight plan After setting a parallel track to your current flight plan a magenta parallel track line will be drawn offset from the original by the selected distance The original course line will be drawn in white The aircraft will navigate to the parallel track course line When you reach the end of the flight plan a message will state Parallel offset terminating in X seconds The message will be given when the aircraft reaches the offset distance from the end of the parallel track This will give the pilot sufficient time to inter cept the ori
193. ight plan in sync with changes made on the GNS sys tem Essentially the crossfill feature is one way from the GTN to the GNS The GIN systems support a variety of procedure leg types that the GNS systems do not support As such it is normal and expected that the flight plan leg that is dis played on the GNS system will not always match the flight plan leg on the GTN system Departure arrival and ap proach procedures often contain leg types that the GNS does not support The GNS typically skips over these leg types and provides no guidance Guidance may be 190 00357 00 Rev H 175 9 AUX PAGES Utility Page available on the GIN but not on the GNS in these cases The GNS will fly the procedure as it normally would if Crosshill were not active Once a leg type is reached that is supported on both the GTN and GNS systems the sys tems will automatically sync to the same leg Waypoint names longer than six characters or dupli cates sent from the GTN unit to the GNS unit will replace some characters with a sign while leaving significant characters to aid in identification such as USR003 becomes US 003 To Enable Flight Plan Crossfill from the GTN Unit 1 From the Default NAV Page Active Flight Plan page or the User Waypoint page press MENU Highlight GTN Crossfill and then press ENT OR 2 On the Aux Flight Planning page scroll down to Manual GTN Crosstill with the large or sma
194. in is inhibited the terrain page will still be active but alerts and messages will not be generated See the Terrain Alerts section for more information on terrain alerts TERRAIN configured units will restore the inhibit state at startup to the last pilot selected setting TAWS configured units will always start up with TAWS alerts uninhibited Inhibit Terrain View 120 Show Aviation Data Inhibiting Terrain 2 NAV PAGES Terrain Operation To inhibit Terrain 1 Select the Terrain Page and press MENU Inhibit Terrain is selected by default Press ENT The Terrain system is inhibited The TER INHB annunciation is displayed in the terrain annunciator field whenever terrain is inhibited To enable TERRAIN No 190 00357 00 Rev H LE a View 120 Show Aviation Data Enabling Terrain Select the Terrain Page and press MENU Enable Terrain is selected by default Press ENT The Terrain system is functional again 45 2 NAV PAGES Terrain Operation Terrain Symbols The following symbols are used to represent obstacles and potential impact points on the Terrain Page Note that obstacle symbols are shown on display zoom ranges up to 10 NM The Garmin TERRAIN system uses yellow cau tion and red warning to depict terrain information relative to aircraft altitude Each color is associated with an alert severity level Terrain graphics and visual annunciat
195. in the desired window COM or VLOC press the small left knob momentarily to switch the highlight between the COM and VLOC win dows Adjusting the frequencies with the large and small left knobs will affect the standby frequency 2 Turn the large left knob to select the desired megahertz MHz value For example the 117 portion of the frequency 117 70 190 00357 00 Rev H 3 Turn the small left knob to select the desired kilohertz kHz value For example the 70 portion of the frequency 117 70 4 To activate the selected frequency press the appropriate flip flop key COM for commu nication frequencies or VLOC for VOR Localizer frequencies Once you ve entered the active frequency simply repeat steps 1 through 3 above to enter the standby frequency After both communication frequencies have been entered you may elect to keep the COM window hot by leaving the cursor on the standby frequency or move the cursor to the VLOC window by pressing the small left knob NOTE When selecting VLOC frequencies the tuning cursor automatically returns to the COM window after 30 seconds of inactivity NOTE GPS level of service annunciations LPV ENR etc are not applicable to the external CDI or HS when VLOC is active 133 606 Cursor highlights COM window To switch the active and standby frequen cies press the COM flip flop key Switching the active and standby frequencies does not remove the cu
196. inal fac tory settings 1 Select the desired item trom the Setup 1 Page 2 Press MENU to display a page options window 5 Turn the small right knob to select the desired 3 With Restore Defaults highlighted press frequency ENT 6 Repeat for the desired frequencies Press the small right knob to finish When the remote Com frequency recall switch is pressed the next preset frequency will be moved into ana Restore Defaults the Com Standby frequency box and a small window with the current Com Frequency Preset number will appear next to it You can scroll down through the preset frequencies by repeatedly pressing the remote Com Frequency recall switch Empty Preset slots are skipped 190 00357 00 Rev H 193 9 AUX PAGES Setup 2 Page SEAS SELECTION SBAS Selection To enable WAAS operation in the Setup 2 page On select the SBAS Space Based Augmentation System item and then select WAAS If WAAS is disabled the unit will not be able to fly WAAS approaches LP LPV LNAV VNAV or LNAV V It WAAS was previously disabled it may take sev eral minutes to achieve a 3D Diff fix after re enabling l WAAS To enable WAAS operation select the SBAS Selection menu option 1 Select SBAS Selection from the Setup 2 Page l and press ENT 3 Turn the small right knob to select On or SETUP 2 Off and then press ENT Press the Cursor knob to exit WAAS selection NOTE There may
197. ind that some VOR VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport iden tifiers If a destination airport does not have a published approach the 500W series unit indicates NONE for the available procedures as listed on the Airport Approach Page For more information on selecting an approach see Section 4 Flight Plans What happens when I select an approach Can I store a flight plan with an approach departure or arrival Whenever you load an approach departure or arrival into the active flight plan a set of approach departure or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument procedure you selected The original en route portion of the flight plan remains active unless you Activate the instrument proce dure which may be done when the procedure is loaded or at a later time Flight plans can also be stored with an approach de parture or arrival Keep in mind that the active flight plan is erased when the unit is turned off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated When storing flight plans with an approach departure or arrival the 500W series unit uses the waypoint information from the current da tabase to define the waypoints If the database is changed or updated the 500W series unit automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been modified If an approach departure or arrival procedure is no longer available the flight
198. indication appears in the COM window If the microphone is stuck or accidentally left in the keyed position or continues to transmit after the key is released the COM transmitter automatically times out or ceases to transmit after 35 seconds of continuous broadcasting You will also receive a COM push to talk key stuck message as long as the stuck condition exists HESSAGES A COM push to talk key stuck message appears to warn you of a stuck microphone Transmitting is disabled after 35 seconds of continuous broadcasting Remote Frequency Selection Control On units configured for remote Com frequency recall pressing the remote recall switch will load the next preset Com frequency into the units Standby fre quency box and display a temporary pop up window with the current Preset ID number e g Preset 1 or Preset 12 The remote recall switch can be pressed multiple times to scroll the entire preset frequency list through the Standby frequency box the list will wrap from the bottom of the list back up to the top skipping any empty preset positions The standby frequency isn t activated until a Com flip flop switch either remote or bezel mounted is pressed Remote Frequency Selection only functions on units configured for a remote Com Frequency recall switch See Aux Pages Setup 1 Page Preset Com Frequen cies for instructions on storing preset Com frequencies Preset Com Frequencies are
199. int Page Options The following User Waypoint Page Options are available by pressing the MENU key with the User Waypoint Page displayed View User Waypoint List displays a list of all user waypoints currently stored in memory To view a list of all user waypoints 1 From the User Waypoint Page press MENU to display the User Waypoint Page Options 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight View User Waypoint List and press ENT View User Waypoint List Delete User Waypoint Select View User Waypoint List to display a list of all user waypoints currently stored in memory 3 The top of the User Waypoint List indicates the total number of user waypoints currently used and available memory If more user waypoints are stored than can be displayed on a single screen turn the large right knob to scroll through the User Waypoint List 4 Press the small right knob to return to the User Waypoint Page 190 00357 00 Rev H 6 WPT PAGES User Waypoint List Delete User Waypoint allows you to delete the User Waypoint List selected waypoint from memory The User Waypoint List allows you to review To delete a user waypoint modity rename or delete a selected user waypoint or 1 Select the desired waypoint on the User to delete all user waypoints currently stored in memory Waypoint Page and press MENU to display At the top of the page are indications for number of the User Waypoint Page Options waypoint loc
200. int and press ENT The Vectors option assumes you will receive vectors to the l2 190 00357 00 Rev H final course segment of the approach and will provide navigation guidance to intercept this final course 5 Turnthe large right knob to highlight Load or Activate and press ENT Load adds the approach to the flight plan without imme diately using the approach for navigation guid ance This allows you to continue navigating the original flight plan until cleared for the approach but keeps the approach available for quick activation when needed Activate adds the approach to the flight plan and begins navigating the approach course 3 6 For precision approaches and non precision approaches not approved for GPS a reminder window appears indicating that GPS guidance on such approaches is strictly for monitoring 4 only To confirm this reminder highlight Yes and press ENT Select Arrival Select Arrival allows you to select a published standard terminal arrival route STAR for the destina tion airport or replace the current arrival with a new selection See Section 5 Procedures for information on selecting arrivals using the PROC key Arrivals are not available for all airports in which case the arrival windows will show NONE To select an arrival for a direct to or flight plan destination airport 1 From the Active Flight Plan Page press MENU to display the Act
201. int in the active page flight plan 2 Press the small right knob momentarily to 2 Press the PROC key to display the Procedures activate the flashing cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the frequency for the desired VOR 4 Press ENT to place the frequency in the standby 4 field of the VLOC window 5 Press the VLOC flip flop key to activate the selected frequency 5 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor NOTE For duplex COM operations the VLOC re ceiver may be auto tuned from the Nearest Flight Service Station Page When selecting a VOR or ILS approach manual tuning of the VLOC receiver is not required Once the approach procedure is Loaded or Activated the GNS 530W automatically places the proper frequency in the standby field of the VLOC window If you wish to use this frequency simply press the VLOC flip flop key to activate the frequency Additional information on approach procedures is provided in Section 5 190 00357 00 Rev H Page Turn the large right knob to highlight Select Approach and press ENT A window appears listing the available proce dures Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired procedure and press ENT A second window appears listing available transi tions Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired transition waypoint and press ENT the approach Vectors option assumes that you will receive vecto
202. ints from the active flight plan Deleting a flight plan does not delete the waypoints con tained in the flight plan from the database or user waypoint memory Delete all waypoints in flight plan or No Delete Flight Plan cancels navigation and removes the active flight plan from memory Select Approach Select Approach allows you to select a published instrument approach for the destination airport or replace the current approach with a new selection In many cases you ll find it more convenient to select approaches using the PROC key as described in Section 5 Procedures Copy Flight Plan Invert Flight Plan Delete Flight Plan Select Approach Select Arrival Select Departure Published instrument approaches can be selected and used from the Active Flight Plan Options or by pressing the PROC key The Select Approach option appears in both places To select an approach for a direct to or flight plan destination airport 1 From the Active Flight Plan Page press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options 2 Highlight the Select Approach option and press ENT 3 A window appears listing the available approaches for your destination airport Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired approach and press ENT 4 A second window appears listing available transitions for the approach Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired transi tion waypo
203. ion the active flight plan including VNAV parameters any stored flight plan or user waypoints to a second 400W or 500W series Garmin unit See Section 9 Aux Pages Flight Planning Crosshill Operation for additional details on using the Crossfill option NOTE The databases of the 400 500 series and the 400W 500W are incompatible so you may not mix systems 32 190 00357 00 Rev H Default Nav Page Auto Zoom An autozoom feature is available for the Default NAV Page which automatically adjusts from an en route range of 200 NM through each lower range stopping at 5 0 NM as you approach your destination waypoint By default the autozoom feature is disabled To enable disable the autozoom feature 1 Starting with the Default NAV Page press the MENU key to display an options menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Enable Auto Zoom or Disable Auto Zoom and press ENT to select this option Enable Auto oom Change Fields Restore Defaults Autozoom automatically adjusts the map range as you approach your destination waypoint 2 NAV PAGES Map Page Map Page The second NAV page is the map page which dis plays your present position using an airplane symbol along with nearby airports navaids user defined waypoints airspace boundaries lakes rivers high ways and cities NOTE The electronic chart is an aid to navigation and is designed to facilitate the use of
204. ion the auto unit could be thought of as the master unit Manual Crossfill Operation If manual operation is desired the pilot must invoke all transfers from that unit When a unit is configured for automatic transfer a manual transfer can also be done on command If either of the messages data transfer error or data transter cancelled are received during an automatic or manual transter the pilot must force another transfer 190 00357 00 Rev H 173 9 AUX PAGES 174 Utility Page To transfer flight plans or user waypoints to from a second 500W Series or 400W Series unit 1 While viewing the default Nav page Flight Plan Catalog Active Flight Plan page User Waypoint page or the User Waypoint page by pressing MENU scrolling down to Crossfill with the large right knob and then pressing ENT On the Aux Flight Planning page scroll down to Crossfill with the large right knob and then press ENT Turn the large right knob to highlight the Method field Turn the small right knob to select Auto or Manual Auto automati cally transfers any selection of or any change to a direct to destination or active flight plan including VNAV parameters to a second 500W 400W Series Garmin unit Initiate Transfer The flashing cursor highlights the transfer data option TRANSFER field Turn the small right knob to display a window of available data options 190 00357 0
205. ions for limited usage as follows TX transmit only RX receive only PT part time frequency Navigation frequencies for ILS and localizer If a listed frequency has sector or altitude restrictions LOC also appear on the list A reversed c the frequency is preceded by an Info designation is to the left of CTAF frequencies 190 00357 00 Rev H 127 6 WPT PAGES Airport Frequencies To view usage restrictions for a frequency 1 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the Info designation directly to the left of the desired trequency E When Info appears to the left of a dis played frequency the frequency has usage restrictions 2 Press ENT to display the restriction informa tion DEPARTURE To display the usage restrictions highlight Info and press ENT A pop up window displays the restriction information 3 To return to the Airport Frequency Page press ENT The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Frequency Page e Usage type Public Military Heliport or Private e Frequency Communication frequencies which may include restrictions Approach Arrival Class B Class C CTA Departure TMA Terminal Communication frequencies without restrictions ATIS ASOS AWOS Center Clearance Gate Control Ground Helicopter Multicom Pre taxi Radar Ramp Other Tower Unicom Navigation frequencies ILS LOC Airpo
206. ions also use these color assignments NOTE If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TERRAIN Page Obstacle Symbol e aja z General Database Information The Garmin TERRAIN system uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content per TSO C151b However the information displayed should never be understood to be all inclusive Pilots must familiarize themselves with the appropriate charts for safe flight NOTE The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies Garmin accurately processes and cross validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data The terrain obstacle databases are contained on a datacard which is inserted in the right most slot of the 500W Series units Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Color TERRAIN Obstacle lt 1000 AGL gt 1000 AGL lt 1000 AGL gt 1000 aGL Alert Level Location Red Warning Terrain Obstacle above or within 100 ft below current aircraft altitude Terrain Obstacle between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude Terrain Color Symbology 100 ft Io 1000 ft Projected Flight Path FA Unlighted Obstacle Potential Impact Point Terrain more than 1000 ft below th
207. is operational 190 00357 00 Rev H 85 5 PROCEDURES Procedure Turn Approach Approach operations on the 500W series units 4 Activate the full approach or vectors to final typically begin with the same basic steps as appropriate In some scenarios you may find it more convenient to immediately activate the approach and skip the Load process outlined above in step 3 The 500W series units provide both options Approaches with Procedure Turns The procedure turn portion of an approach is stored as one of the legs of the approach For this reason the 500W series unit requires no special opera tions from the pilot other than flying the procedure turn itself beyond what is required for any other type of approach Roll steering is provided to aircratt 8109 2 LYH with compatible autopilots memm eee Lynchburg VA Regional o he l e VOR or GPS Rwy 04 DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION Basic Steps for Using Approaches 1 Select the destination airport using the direct to key or as the last waypoint in the active flight plan 2 Choose the Select Approach option trom the Procedures Page or trom the Active Flight Plan Options DO NOT USE FOR 3 Load the approach often while en route in NAVIGATION anticipation of its future use This places the approach in the active flight plan but retains This example uses the VOR or GPS Runway 04 course guidance in the en route se
208. it Active Flight Plan Flight Plan Catalog Flight Plan Catalog 5 Use the small and large right knobs to enter The Flight Plan Catalog allows you to create edit the identitier of the new waypoint and press activate delete and copy flight plans Flight plans ENT numbered from 1 through 19 are used to save flight 6 Once all changes have been made press the plans for future use Flight plan 00 is reserved small right knob to return to the Flight Plan exclusively for the active flight plan currently in use Catalog for navigation Any time you activate a flight plan a copy of the flight plan is automatically transferred to flight plan 0 and overwrites any previously active flight plan Flight Plan Editing To add a waypoint to an existing flight plan 1 Press FPL and turn the small right knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog 2 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan and press ENT 4 Turn the large right knob to select the point where you wish to add the new waypoint It an existing waypoint is highlighted the new waypoint is placed directly in front of this waypoint 190 00357 00 Rev H 65 4 FLIGHT PLANS Editing Flight Plans To delete a waypoint from an existing flight plan 1 Press FPL and turn the small right knob to display the Flight Plan To change the comment line for an existing flight plan 2
209. ive Flight Plan Page Options 2 Highlight the Select Arrival option and press ENT 6 190 00357 00 Rev H 4 FLIGHT PLANS Active Flight Plan Options Copy Flight Plan Invert Flight Plan Delete Flight Plan Select Approach Select Departure Closest Point of FPL Select Arrival and Select Departure allow you to select and use published arrival routes STARs and published instrument departures SIDs A window appears listing the available arrivals for your destination airport Turn the small right knob to select the desired arrival and press ENT A second window appears listing available transitions for the arrival Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired transition waypoint and press ENT A third window appears listing available runways for the arrival Turn the small right knob to highlight the desired runway and press ENT 133 008 VECTORS COCAP DOCEN Once the arrival or departure is selected a window appears to select the desired transi tion waypoint With Load highlighted press ENT The arrival is now inserted into your flight plan 73 4 FLIGHT PLANS Active Flight Plan Options Remove Approach Arrival or Departure Remove Approach deletes the currently selected approach from the active flight plan Remove Arrival deletes the current Arrival STAR from the active flight plan Remove Departure deletes the current departure SID from th
210. k e Distance to dest Ground speed e All external annunciators if installed The Instrument Panel Self Test Page indicates the currently selected OBS course fuel capacity CAP fuel on board FOB and fuel flow FF The fuel capacity is entered manually Fuel on board and fuel flow may be manually entered if your installation does not include connection to sensors which automatically provide these figures IMSTRUHEMT PAHEL SELF TEST M Set Full Fuel Go To Checklists Go To Checklists OK Enter the fuel capacity fuel on board or fuel flow figures directly onto the appropriate field of the Instrument Panel Self Test Page Fuel on board and fuel flow are automatically provided if your installation includes connection to external 6 190 00357 00 Rev H sensors Fuel On Board and Checklists The Instrument Panel Self Test Page includes selec tions to set fuel on board FOB to full capacity and access the Checklists Page This allows you to quickly set fuel to full limits and display any checklists you ve entered such as start up or takeoff checklists To set fuel on board to full if not provided by sensor 1 Turn the large right knob to highlight Set Full Fuel Go To Checklists OK Select Set Full Fuel to set fuel on board FOB to full capacity 2 Press ENT and verity that fuel on board FOB now matches the fuel capacity CAP figure Fuel on board is now reduced
211. knob to select the desired surface The following options are available Any surface Hard surfaces Only Hard Soft surfaces e Water landings only Hard Only Hard 7 Soft Water 3 Press ENT to accept the runway surface selec tion 4 The flashing cursor moves to the minimum runway length field To enter a different mini mum runway length use the small and large right knobs to enter the desired length Press ENT when finished A runway length of O or a very short length will report all available runways 9 AUX PAGES Setup 2 Page NOTE Exercise caution when changing the Near est Airport Criteria Remember by excluding certain surface types or shorter runway lengths you may be excluding airports from the nearest list that are more than adequate for an emergency landing Data Field Configuration To change the configuration of the data field below the VLOC window 1 Select Data Field Configuration trom the Setup Page 2 Turn the small right knob to select the desired data field option The following options are available DATA FIELD CONFIGURATION VOR 7 LOC Data Config Data Fields e VOR LOC Data displays the identifier distance and radial FROM the tuned VOR sta tion active in the VLOC window When tuned to a nearby localizer the localizer identifier associated airport and runway are displayed instead Configurable Data Fields displays a user selectable
212. l Select Approach Chol Select Load and Activate to immediately begin using the approach waypoints for navigation guidance press ENT 4 Select the desired transition and press ENT Select Approach Chnl allows you to select the channel number for a WAAS approach for the current destination The channel number for the WAAS approach is available from an approved approach chart To select the Destination airport from the Airport Approach Page To select the next FPL airport from the Airport Approach Page As described earlier in this section If duplicate numbers are available for a channel a list will be available where you may select the As described earlier in this section After selecting Select Approach Chnl choose the WAAS channel number for the current destination After selecting the Approach Channel the WAAS approach ID will be shown in the top left corner of the map display 190 00357 00 Rev H 131 6 WPT PAGES Airport Arrivals Airport Arrival Page The Airport Arrival Page shows the available Airport Standard Terminal Arrival STAR procedures for the selected airport Where multiple transitions or runways are associated with the arrival procedure that information may also be displayed A map image provides a layout diagram for each arrival transition and runway Identifier Symbol and Type Map Image Arrival Procedure Name E Poiti _ Transitions REED pow 5 mi
213. le on this page To display a 120 view 1 Select the Terrain Page and press MENU 2 Select View 120 3 Press ENT To switch back to a 360 view repeat step 1 select View 360 and press ENT Seven display ranges are available allowing for a more complete view of the surrounding area To change the display range 1 Select the Terrain Page and press up or down on the RNG key to select the desired range 1 NM 2 NM 5 NM 10 NM 25 NM 50 NM 100 NM Aviation information such as airports VORs and other navaids can be turned on or off from the Terrain Page PAGE HENU Inhibit Terrain View 120 qohow Aviation Data Show Aviation Data Menu Selection 44 190 00357 00 Rev H To show or hide aviation data 1 Select the Terrain Page and press MENU 2 Select Show or Hide Aviation Data and press ENT Pressing the CLR key when the TERRAIN Page is displayed will also toggle aviation information on or off Inhibit Mode The Garmin Terrain system provides an inhibit mode This mode is designed to deactivate Premature Descent Alert Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance PDA FLTA visual alerts when they are deemed unnecessary by the pilot Flying VFR into an area where unique terrain exists could cause the system to annunciate a nuisance alert Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting the TERRAIN system and always remember to enable the system when appropriate When Terra
214. lection setting is changed to Manual you must determine when to select GPS or VLOC guidance during the approach Remember VLOC is required for the final course segment from Final Approach Fix FAF to MAP element again If the ILS CDI Capture setting is changed to Manual you must select VLOC guidance manually by pressing the CDI key NOTE Installations with certain autopilots such as the A KAP 140 and KFC225 do not allow automatic ILS CDI switching NOTE GPS level of service annunciations LPV ENR etc are not applicable to the external CDI or HSI when VLOC is active e If the CDI output has not automatically switched from GPS to ILS upon reaching the FAF you must manually switch to the VLOC receiver by pressing the CDI key Verity that VLOC is displayed directly above to the CDI key e Automatic switching of CDI output is available for ILS localizer SDF and LDA approaches Auto matic CDI switching is not available for backcourse approaches or VOR approaches 118 190 00357 00 Rev H e When flying an approach with the autopilot coupled you must monitor system functions at all times and verify that the autopilot and external CDI or HSI switch to the VLOC receiver with sufficient time to capture and track the approach course Switching to VLOC late in the approach may not provide the autopilot enough time to respond and intercept the approach course prior to the
215. ll right knob and then press ENT With the Link field highlighted turn the small right knob to show Enabled and then press ENT This enables the GNS unit to receive flight plan information from the GTN unit CAUTION The user is required to always verify each flight plan leg prior to navigating with the GNS unit when Manual GTN Crossfill is active NOTE If the user manually alters the flight plan on the GNS unit the systems will not crossfill until the pilot activates the feature again on the GNS unit To Transfer GNS User Waypoints to the GTN Unit 1 2 176 190 00357 00 Rev H Continuing from the steps above turn the large right knob to highlight Initiate Trans fer Press ENT The 400W 500W series unit s User waypoints will be sent to the GTN unit Utility Page The Utility Page provides access to checklists a count down up timer trip timers trip statistics RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring predic tion and sottware database version information When a utility item selected the corresponding page appears providing additional information and features UTILITY To select highlight with cursor and press ENT Second Page in AUX Group To select an item from the Utility Page 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large or small right knob to select the desired item and press ENT From the Utility Page highlight the desired item a
216. lts 38 190 00357 00 Rev H 2 NAV PAGES ETONI o Map Setup To change a map setup feature Setup Map allows you to configure the map 1 Press MENU with the Map Page displayed display to your preferences including map orientation Turn the large right knob to highlight Setup land data enable disable Jeppesen data enable disable Map and press ENT automatic zoom airspace boundaries and text size 3 To change map orientation Turn the small The following table lists the group names and available right knob to select Map and press ENT settings Turn the large right knob to highlight the Orientation field then turn the small right Orientation AutoZoom Land Data Knob to select the desired option Select North up to fix the top of the map display to a north heading Select Track up to adjust the 7 top of the map display to your current ground track Select DTK up to fix the top of the map Active Flight Plan Direct To Lat Lon display to your desired course Press ENT to Line Road Grid Freeways National Highways accept the selected option Local Highways Local Roads Railroads 4 To enable disable automatic zoom Turn the Active Flight Plan Waypoints Large small right knob to select Map and press Waypoint Medium Small Airports Intersections ENT Turn the large right knob to highlight NDBs VORS User Waypoints the Auto Zoom field and t
217. mall right knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Press the MENU key to display the Flight Plan Catalog Options Turn the large right knob to select Create New Flight Plan and press ENT 190 00357 00 Rev H TAKEOFF TOUR Flight Plans Create New Flight Plan Delete All Flight Plans Sort List By Number To create a new flight plan select Cre ate New Flight Plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Options The cursor appears on the first waypoint identi fier field located directly below WAYPOINT Use the large and small right knobs to enter the identifier of the first waypoint in the flight plan the small knob is used to select the desired letter or number and the large knob is used to move to the next character space Enter the identifier for each airport and or navaid into the flight plan in the same sequence you wish to fly Press ENT once the identifier has been selected The cursor moves to the next blank waypoint identifier field Repeat steps 4 and 5 above until all waypoints for the flight plan have been entered 21 TAKEOFF TOUR Flight Plans 7 Press the small right knob to remove the highlighting Once the flight plan is created it may be activated trom an options window Activating the flight plan copies it into flight plan 00 the original flight plan still resides in the Flight Catalog and replaces any flight plan which currently exists in flight plan 00 To
218. ment of the approach Turn the small right knob to select the desired option and press ENT Vectors guidance is relative to the final inbound course A line is drawn beyond the final approach fix allowing you to intercept the final course segment beyond its normal limits 5 For departures and arrivals pop up windows appear to select the desired transition and runway s Turn the small right knob to select the desired option and press ENT 6 With Load highlighted press ENT to add the procedure to the flight plan or direct to The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the sequence of waypoints in the flight plan or direct to as shown on the Active Route Page You can later activate the selected procedure from the Procedures Page or the Active Flight Plan Page 190 00357 00 Rev H 17 TAKEOFF TOUR Nearest Airports Nearest Pages To display the NRST pages The NRST page group provides listings for nearest 1 If necessary press the small right knob to airports or other facilities The NRST group includes detailed information on the 25 nearest airports VORs NDBs intersections and user created waypoints within 200 NM of your current position In addition pages are also provided to display the five nearest center ARTCC FIR and Flight Service Station FSS points of commu nication plus alert you to any special use or controlled airspace you may be in or near The Nearest Airp
219. modifications Invalid waypoint ident An attempt was made to create a user waypoint with an invalid name The 500W series unit does not allow spaces between characters in the waypoint name Large magnetic variance Verify all course angles A valid value of magnetic variation is not available for this location Check all course angles manually Loss of GPS Navigation Use other NAV if available The Dead Reckoning annunciator appears on the lett side of the map display when GPS position is unavailable and the unit is in Dead Reckoning mode Dead Reckoning mode will continue until GPS position is restored Loss of integrity cross check NAV The GPS posi tion does not meet necessary criteria Use other navigation devices to verily your position and navigation Low Battery Unit Needs Service Time data may have been lost due to a memory battery failure MAIN processor requires service The 500W series unit has detected a failure in the main system processor The 500W series unit is not usable and should be taken to your Garmin dealer for service 12 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS Near airspace less than 2 nm Your GPS calculated position is within 2 NM of a special use airspace boundary but you are not projected to enter the airspace This mes sage is automatically disabled within 30 NM of an arrival airport when an approach is loaded No altitude input is being received No
220. n finished COM Configuration allows you to select 8 33 kHz or 25 0 kHz COM frequency channel spacing NOTE 8 33 kHz VHF communication frequency channel spacing is not approved for use in the United States Select the 25 0 kHz channel spacing option for use in the United States CDI Alarms To set the ai ing messages or change A ee enn g g This buffer distance is added to the floor the altitude buffer o l ceiling limits and provides an added margin 1 Select CDI Alarms from the Setup 1 Page of safety 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the A NOTE When an approach has been loaded into On Off field next to the desired airspace the active flight plan airspace alert messages are type MOAs amp Other Airspace includes mili disabled within 31 NM of the destination airport tary operation alert caution danger training To change the maximum CDI scale setting and warning areas 1 Select CDI Alarms trom the Setup Page 2 The flashing cursor highlights the Selected CDI field Turn the small right knob to select the desired CDI scale The selected scale and any lower scale settings are used during the various phases of flight as described in Section 11 FDE CDI Alarms 3 Press ENT to accept the selected scale The System CDI field displays the CDI scale cur rently in use The System CDI setting may Turn the large right knob to select the de differ from the
221. n quickly retrieve information such as floor ceiling limits and controlling agency directly from the map View Frequencies Use the panning function and ENT key to retrieve airspace information from the map To view airspace information for an on screen special use or controlled airspace 1 Use the panning function see previous page to place the target pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace If the area is congested and it is difficult to select an open area you may need to zoom in or press CLR to make the selection easier 36 190 00357 00 Rev H 2 Press the ENT key to display the Page Menu Highlight Review Airspace PAGE HEHU Review TFR Create User Wpt 3 Press ENT to display the airspace information Press ENT again to return to the Nav page Done KANSAS CITY COMHTROLLIWG AGENCY STATUS YERT LIHITS View Frequencies Po NA a To display airspace frequencies 1 While viewing the Nav map page press the small right CRSR knob Turn the large and small right knobs to highlight an airspace arc 2 Press the ENT key to display the Page Menu Highlight Review Airspace F PAGE HEHU Review TFR Create User Wpt 3 Press ENT to display the airspace informa tion 4 Turn the large right knob to highlight View Frequencies 190 00357 00 Rev H 2 NAV PAGES Airspace Information KANSAS CITY COHTROLLIWG AGEHCY
222. nautical miles of the destination the 500W series unit switches from en route mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions from 2 0 to 1 0 nautical miles full scale deflec tion 2 As you approach the IAF a turn direction mes Sage appears on the bottom of the screen 3 As the distance DIST to the IAF approaches zero the message is replaced by a time to turn advisory that counts down 10 seconds prior to the turn 4 As you approach the FAF the 500W series unit 190 00357 00 Rev H 115 5 PROCEDURES Flying the LP Approach will begin to automatically rescale in an an gular fashion This will allow the LP approach to be flown in the same fashion as a standard localizer approach At 2 0 nautical miles trom the FAF CDI scaling is tightened trom up to either 2 or 0 3 nautical miles full scale detlec tion whichever is smaller Sixty seconds prior to reaching the FAF the 500W series unit will check the required Horizontal Alarm Limit HAL to ensure the GPS position integrity is within limits to complete the LP non precision approach In the event the HAL limits are exceeded the approach will be downgraded when available indicated by LNAV on the moving map otherwise the approach will be aborted A message will note that the approach is downgraded and the NAV indicator will be flagged You may continue the approach using LNAV non precision minimums if there are LNAV minimums for this approach In th
223. ncing waypoints holds on selected waypoint Change in HSI does not Manually select course to affect CDI deflection next waypoint from HSI Always navigates TO the Will indicate TO or active waypoint FROM waypoint Must be in this mode for Cannot be set for final ap final approach course proach course or published holding patterns APPENDIX C Troubleshooting Q amp A When should use the OBS key to return to auto sequencing and what happens when do The most common application for using the OBS key is the missed approach The 500W series unit suspends automatic waypoint sequencing indicated by a SUSP annunciation directly above the OBS key see left when you cross the missed approach point MAP This pre vents the 500W series unit from automatically sequenc ing to the missed approach holding point MAHP If a missed approach is required press the OBS key to return to automatic waypoint sequencing and sequence the ap proach to the MAHP Why won t my unit automatically sequence to the next waypoint The 500W series unit only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled i e no OBS or SUSP annunciation directly above the OBS key For automatic sequencing to occur you must also cross the bisector of the turn you are navigating The bisector is a perpendicular line between two flight plan legs which crosses through the waypoint common to
224. ncy The selected frequency is placed in the standby field of the COM window and activated using the COM flip flop key For duplex operations RX and TX indications appear beside the listed frequencies indicating receive only or transmit only frequencies The asso 4 ciated VOR is also provided for reference 156 190 00357 00 Rev H FSS Name Frequency s VOR Identifier for duplex operation EMRE Poo Seventh Page in NRST Group eee Distance To To quickly tune an FSS s frequency from the Near est Flight Service Station Page GNS 530W only 6 Press the COM flip flop key to activate the l Select the Nearest Flight Service Station Page Press the small right knob to activate the cursor Turn the small right knob to scroll through the list selecting the desired FSS Turn the small right knob to select the desired FSS then turn the large right knob to highlight the desired frequency Turn the large right knob to scroll down the page highlighting the desired frequency COM frequency s or VOR frequency for duplex operation Press ENT to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the COM or VLOC window 7 NRST PAGES Nearest Airspaces Press ENT to place the frequency on standby Airspace near and ahead indicates that you Press the COM or VLOC flip flop key to are within two nautical miles of an airspace activate the selected frequency Navigation a
225. nd press ENT 9 AUX PAGES Utility Page to display the corresponding option page e g Trip Statistics Page 3 Press the small right knob to return to the previous item The following items are available Checklists provides up to nine different user defined checklists containing up to 30 items each Flight Timers provides count up down timers plus automatic recording of departure time and total trip time Departure and total trip time recording can be configured to run either any time 500W series unit power is on or only when your ground speed exceeds 30 knots In helicopter installations flight timers will be only run if the air ground switch indicates the aircraft is off the ground or if GPS air speed is greater than 20 kts Trip Statistics provides readouts for trip odom eters average speed and maximum speed These readouts are resettable individually or all at once by pressing MENU to display an options window 190 00357 00 Rev H 177 9 AUX PAGES Utility Page RAIM Prediction predicts if GPS coverage is available tor your current location or at a specified waypoint at any time and date Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring performs checks to ensure that the 500W series unit has adequate satellite geometry during your flight RAIM availability is near 100 in Oceanic En Route and Terminal phases ot flight Because the FAAs TSO requirements for non precision approaches
226. nd projected to enter the airspace frequencies for ILS and localizer LOC also appear on the list e Ifyou are within two nautical miles of an airspace and your current course will not take you inside the message Near airspace less than 2nm appears The Nearest Airspace Page shows Within 2nm of airspace 6 Press COM or VLOC flip flop key as appropri ate to activate the selected frequency 7 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor Nearest Airspace Page The last page in the NRST group the Nearest Air space Page alerts you to as many as nine controlled or special use airspaces near or in your flight path Alerts are provided according to the following conditions e If your projected course will take you inside an airspace within the next ten minutes the alert message Airspace ahead less than 10 Near airspace less than 2NM indicates minutes appears The Nearest Airspace Page that you are within two nautical miles of an g i airspace but are NOT projected to enter the shows the airspace as Ahead airspace e Ifyou are within two nautical miles of an airspace and your current course will take you Ifyou have entered an airspace the message inside the message Airspace near and ahead Inside Airspace appears The Nearest Air appears The Nearest Airspace Page shows the space Page shows Inside of airspace airspace as Ahead lt 2nm Note that the
227. nearby airports may also be selected as direct to waypoints using the steps described in Sec 7 NRST Pages Navigating to a Nearby Waypoint SELECT HAYPOIHT The nearest airport NRST field allows you to select any of the 25 nearest airports as your current direct to waypoint To select a nearby airport as a direct to waypoint 1 190 00357 00 Rev H Press the direct to key The select direct to waypoint page appears with the waypoint identifier field highlighted Turn the large right knob to highlight the nearest airport NRST field Turn the small right knob to display a window showing up to nine nearby airports Continue turning the small right knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired airport Press ENT to confirm the selected waypoint and ENT again to activate the direct to func tion 61 3 DIRECT TO Direct to Shortcuts Shortcuts Direct to waypoints may also be selected from Shortcuts are available when using the direct to the Map Page by panning to the desired location and key allowing you to bypass the use of the small and pressing direct to and ENT twice If no airport large right knobs to enter the waypoint identifier A navaid or user waypoint exists at the desired location direct to can be performed from any page displaying a waypoint named MAP is automatically created at a single waypoint identifier such as the WPT pages the location of the panning pointer
228. ng The GNS 530W s auto tune feature allows you to quickly select any database frequency in the GPS window as your standby frequency Any COM frequency displayed in the GPS window can be transferred to the standby COM frequency field with a minimum of keystrokes required The following are some examples of selecting COM 190 00357 00 Rev H 1 COM frequencies from some of the main GPS pages To select a COM frequency for a nearby airport window press the small left knob momen 1 Select the Nearest Airport Page trom the NRST page group See Section 7 or press and hold CLR then turn the large right knob until the nearest pages appear Finally if necessary turn the small right knob to display the Nearest Airport Page HEAREST AIRPORT Nearest Airport Page with common traffic advisory frequency CTAF for the closest airport highlighted Press the small right knob momentarily to place the cursor on the airport identifier field of the first airport in the list If you wish to select another airport turn the large right knob to highlight the desired airport The Nearest Airport Page displays the common traffic advisory frequency CTAF for each listed airport To select this frequency turn the large right knob to highlight the desired airport s CTAF frequency and press ENT to place the frequency in the standby field of the COM window 25 Auto Tuning Nearest Apt Page Auto Tuning FSS amp Center Freqs
229. ng options are available for the Flight Plan Catalog e Activate Flight Plan Invert and Activate Flight Plan e Create New Flight Plan e Crossfill Copy Flight Plan e Delete Flight Plan e Delete All Flight Plans Sort List by Number Comment Activating Flight Plans Once a flight plan is defined through the Flight Plan Catalog using the steps previously outlined it may be activated for navigation Activating the flight plan copies it into flight plan 00 and overwrites any previous information at that location Activate Flight Plan allows you to select the flight plan for navigation guidance Activate Flight Plan Copy Flight Plan Invert Flight Plan Delete Flight Plan Select Approach Select Arrival Select Departure Activate Flight Plan selects the highlighted flight plan for navigation guidance Invert amp Activate FPL reverses the sequence of the highlighted flight plan then activates it for navigation guidance To activate an existing flight plan 1 From the Flight Plan Catalog press the small right knob to activate the cursor 4 FLIGHT PLANS Activating Inverting 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired flight plan and press MENU to display the Flight Plan Catalog Options 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Acti vate Flight Plan and press ENT Inverting Flight Plans Invert amp Activate FPL allows you to reverse the highlight
230. ng the small right knob to select the desired time format Press ENT to accept the selection To set the local time 1 2 Select Date Time from the Setup Page Turn the large right knob to highlight the time offset field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the desired offset beginning by entering a minus or plus sign to indicate whether the offset is behind UTC or ahead of UTC In the United States all local time offsets are minus or behind UTC Press ENT to accept the selected offset NOTE When a local time offset is entered you must also select Local 12 hour or Local 24 hour time format The UTC time format setting ignores any time offset entry Display Backlight To change the backlighting intensity 1 190 00357 00 Rev H Select Display Backlight from the Setup Page The flashing cursor highlights the backlight Mode field Turn the small right knob to select the desired mode Auto or Manual Press ENT to accept the selection If Manual is selected the flashing cursor moves to the backlight Level field Turn the small right knob to select the desired level Press ENT to accept the selection Nearest Airport Criteria To set the minimum runway length and runway surface 1 Select Nearest Airport Criteria trom the Setup Page 2 The flashing cursor highlights the Runway Surface field Turn the small right
231. ning your altimeter Press ENT when finished DEHSITY ALT 7 TAS 7 HINDS The current time and date are automatically offered for departure time and date To ac cept either automatic selection simply press the indicated altitude ENT when the selection is highlighted Use the small and large right knobs to enter 3 The flashing cursor moves to the calibrated airspeed CAS field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the airspeed from your airspeed indicator Press ENT when finished 7 The flashing cursor moves to the ground speed GS field Use the small and large right knobs to override the current ground speed and enter a planning figure Press ENT when finished To return ground speed reading to current conditions highlight the ground speed GS field press CLR then press ENT 8 With all variables entered the following infor mation is provided 4 The flashing cursor moves to the barometric pressure BARO field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the barometric pressure altimeter setting Press ENT when finished 5 The flashing cursor moves to the total air tem perature TAT field Use the small and large e DTK Desired track or desired course right knobs to enter the temperature Press e DIS Distance to waypoint ENT when finished e ETE Estimated time en route e FSA En route sale altitude e ETA Estimated time of arrival e Sunrise Sunset times at the destin
232. nobs to enter the message text Press ENT when finished The 500W series unit stores up to nine sched uled messages holding 20 characters each The flashing cursor moves to the type field under the new message Turn the small right knob to display a window of available options Event One Time or Periodic Press ENT to select the highlighted option ve One Time ji Periodic Turn the small right knob to select the desired message type One Time and Periodic messages appear when the time expires Event based messages expire at a specified time and date The flashing cursor moves to the time or date field Use the small and large right knobs to set the time or date required before the message is displayed Time is entered as hours minutes seconds hhh mmi ss Event based messages expire at a specified date and time Press ENT when finished entering time or date Use the small and large right knobs to enter the time or date To edit a scheduled message 1 Select Scheduler from the Flight Planning Page The flashing cursor highlights the first message field To edit the message text turn the large right knob to highlight the desired message field Use the small and large right knobs to edit the message text entering the new text directly over the old message Press ENT when finished To edit the time field turn the large right knob to highlight the field Use the small and large right knobs
233. nsible for all terrain and obstacle avoidance using information not provided by the 500W series Terrain feature CAUTION The Garmin 500W series does not contain any user serviceable parts Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void your warranty and authority to operate this device under FCC Part 15 regulations INTRODUCTION Warnings Cautions and Notes database than in the legacy units The databases are must use a WAAS enabled database contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer birth defects or reproductive harm This notice is being provided in accordance with California s Proposition 65 If you have any questions or would like additional information please refer to our website at www garmin com prop65 Canadian Radio Specifications Standard 102 RSS 102 RF field strength exposure to persons from an antenna connected to this device should be limited to 60V m for controlled environment and 28 V m for uncontrolled environment NOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC limits for Class B digital devices This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Furthermore there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If t
234. o remove the flashing cursor 141 6 WPT PAGES Creating User Waypoints Creating User Waypoints from the Map Page The Map Page and panning target pointer provide a quick means of saving your present position as a user defined waypoint The Map Page can be used to create a user waypoint by panning to the desired location and pressing ENT 4 142 190 00357 00 Rev H To capture and save your present position as a user waypoint With the Map Page displayed press the small right knob to activate the panning function The target pointer appears at your present position Press ENT to capture the pointer s position and display the User Waypoint Page From the Nav Map Page press ENT to mark a location for a User Wpt A four digit number is automatically assigned as the waypoint s name If the cursor is touch ing a named feature an abbreviation of the feature name will be offered for the User waypoint name To change this name turn the large right knob to highlight the name field then use the small and large right knobs to select a new name Press ENT to accept the selected name Use the large right knob to move the cursor to the Create action field With Create highlighted press ENT to save the new waypoint The User Wpt is now shown on the map page 6 WPT PAGES Modifying User Waypoints Modifying User Waypoints To modify an existing waypoint select that 6 Press
235. oach you are given the option to skip any non required holding patterns during the initial transitions of the approach In a GPS approach you will not be given the option and you must manually reselect waypoint sequencing Just prior to crossing BODRY intersection an alert Hold teardrop appears in the lower right corner of the screen to suggest the proper holding pattern entry Hold direct or Hold parallel may be offered on other similar approaches Prior to crossing the BODRY intersection an alert Hold tear drop is shown to suggest the proper holding pattern 93 5 PROCEDURES Approach with Hold DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION As mentioned in the missed approach example the Default NAV Page displays a timer or distance as appropriate during the holding pattern Use this timer or distance to fly the outbound portion of the holding pattern The holding pattern is displayed on the Map Page and indicated as the active leg on the Default NAV and Active Flight Plan pages While flying the holding pattern a timer appears on the De fault NAV Page Use the timer to fly the one minute outbound 94 portion of the pattern 190 00357 00 Rev H NOTE If you need to lose extra altitude or speed by going around the holding pattern again press OBS to manually suspend waypoint sequencing BEFORE crossing the holding waypoint the sec ond time If you ve already passed this waypoint re
236. oint sequencing is suspended alert is replaced by a turn advisory Right to 072 now Dial the outbound course into the CDI or HSI using the OBS knob and initiate a standard rate turn to this course heading 102 190 00357 00 Rev H FORA gt y As the distance to the IAF approaches zero the waypoint alert is replaced by a turn advisory Right to 072 in x sec Initiate a standard rate turn to this course heading Fly the outbound course keeping the CDI needle centered You are now on the course from fix to distance leg as shown on the Active Flight Plan and Default NAV Pages Note the magenta line in the bottom figure which represents the currently active leg of the approach The distance DIS displayed on the above screens is TO the D13 0 point The flight plan automatically sequences to the next leg upon reaching D13 0 At 13 0 NM from the IAF a waypoint alert Next DTK 265 in x sec appears in the lower right corner of the screen Make a stan dard rate turn to the right to intercept the final approach course and watch for the CDI needle to begin to center 190 00357 00 Rev H 5 PROCEDURES Course From Fix Legs At 13 0 NM from the IAF a waypoint alert appears Next DTK 265 in x sec Make a standard rate turn to intercept the approach course As you approach the intermediate fix CF25 a waypoint alert Next DTK 265 in x sec appears Make any
237. om puted altitude is within 500 feet of the final Vertical Naviga tion target altitude Approaching VNAV profile You are within one minute of reaching the initial Vertical Navigation descent point APR Guidance Available Use PROC before A P APR For units configured with the KAP140 or KFC225 autopilot this message reminds pilots when they turn on course to the FAF that they need to enable autopilot outputs by pressing PROC and selecting Enable A P APR Outputs before switching the autopilot control panel to APR Arrival at waypoint waypoint name You are within the arrival alarm circle for the indicated waypoint The size of the arrival alarm circle is defined from the CDI alarms menu option on the Setup Page Audio database integrity error The 500W series unit has detected a problem with the built in TAWS Audio Data base TAWS audio alerts are not available The unit should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service 190 00357 00 Rev H 199 12 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS Aviation database integrity error The 500W series unit has detected a problem with a database on the Nav Data card The data is not usable and the card should be returned to Jeppesen or your Garmin dealer for service Bad geometry parallel offset not activated parallel offset is not activated because of flight plan geometry Basemap database integrity error The 500W series unit has det
238. on fix varies usually within two minutes TAKEOFF TOUR Acquiring Satellites Messages Acquiring Satellites Messages If the 500W series unit has not been operated for a period of six months or more it may have to Search the Sky to collect new data This means the unit is acquiring satellite data to establish almanac and satel lite orbit information which can take 5 to 10 minutes The Satellite Status Page displays a Searching Sky status and the message annunciator MSG above the MSG key also flashes to alert you of a system message Searching the Sky The Time and other data may not be displayed until the unit has acquired enough satellites for a fix To view a system message press MSG The Message Page appears and displays the status or warning information applicable to the receiver s cur rent operating condition To return to the previous page after viewing a message press MSG again n 01020305 06 OF 0810111213135 334045 The Satellite Status Page shows the ID num bers for the satellites and the relative signal strength of each satellite received as a bar graph reading Searching Sky indicates that satellite almanac data is not available The data is recollected from the first available satellite Acquiring indicates that satellites have been located and information is being acquired but the receiver does not have enough satellites for a 3 dimen sional p
239. on for a nearby intersec tion start from the Nearest Intersection Page and follow steps 2 through 4 above Nearest NDB Page The Nearest NDB Page displays the identifier symbol bearing distance and frequency to the 25 nearest NDBs within 200 NM of your present posi tion To view additional information for a nearby NDB start from the Nearest NDB Page and follow steps 2 through 4 above 190 00357 00 Rev H 153 7 NRST PAGES Nearest VORs Nearest VOR Page The Nearest VOR Page displays the identifter symbol bearing and distance to the 25 nearest VORs within 200 NM of your present position For each VOR listed the Nearest VOR Page also indicates the frequency and may be used to quickly tune the VLOC receiver to the nearby VOR GNS 530W only The selected frequency is placed in the standby field of the VLOC window and activated using the VLOC flip flop key Scroll Bar VOR Frequency Fourth Page in NRST Group VOR Identifier Bearing To and and Symbol Distance To To quickly tune a VOR s frequency from the Near est VOR Page GNS 530W only 1 Select the Nearest VOR Page 2 Press the small right knob to activate the Cursor 3 Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the frequency associated with the desired VOR 4 Press ENT to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the VLOC window To quickly tune a VOR s frequency from the Nearest VOR Page hig
240. on the departure DEP procedure name field APT 123 008 11540 CHIEFS LAKESS5 END RACERS 939 ROYALS TIFTO2 233 WLDCT2 With the cursor on the DEP field turn the small right knob to display a list of available departure procedures 134 190 00357 00 Rev H Turn the small right knob to display a window of available departures for the selected airport Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired departure Press ENT The cursor moves to the runway field Turn the small right knob to display a window of available runways Continue turn ing the small right knob to select the desired runway With the cursor on the RUNWAY field turn the small right knob to display a list of avail able runways NOTE ALL may appear in the runway field indicat ing the departure procedure applies to all runways For airports with parallel runways B may appear at the end of the runway designation to indicate the departure procedure applies to both runways Press ENT The cursor moves to the transitions TRANS field Turn the small right knob to display a window of available transitions Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired transi tion 6 WPT PAGES Airport Departures With the TRANS field highlighted turn the small right knob to select the desired transition 8 Press ENT To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob Airport
241. only available with Main System Software Version 3 00 or later 28 190 00357 00 Rev H Section 2 NAV Pages Main Page Groups The 500W series main pages are divided into groups NAV WPT AUX and NRST While viewing any of these pages selection of another page is a simple selection process using the small and large right knobs NAV WPT 5 7 available pages see list below 10 available pages see Section 6 AUX NRST 4 available pages 8 available pages see Section 9 see Section 7 To select the desired page group turn the large right knob until a page from the desired group is displayed To select the desired page within the group turn the small right knob until the desired page is displayed NAV Page Group Default NAV Map Terrain Satellite Status NAVCOM 2 NAV PAGES Page Groups NAV Page Group The NAV page group includes five or more pages While viewing any NAV page turn the small right knob to select a different NAV page You may find this selection process convenient to cycle between the Default NAV and Map Pages two of the most frequently used pages Other pages are provided to list frequencies for your flight plan show your current position and display current satellite reception NOTE Five or more NAV pages are available depending on installation of optional informa tion sources See the 400W 500W Series Display Interfaces Pilot s Guide Addendum Page Notation
242. ons Key and Knob Functions The 500W series navigators are designed to make operation as simple as possible The descriptions on the next three pages provide a general overview of the primary function s for each key and knob This Take off Tour section is intended to provide a brief overview of the primary functions of your 500W series unit Experiment with the unit and refer to the reference sections for more information Left hand Keys and Knobs Q The COM power volume knob controls unit power and communica tions radio volume Press momentarily to disable automatic squelch control In the GPS 500W this control is used only for power v The VLOC volume knob GNS 530W controls audio volume for the selected VOR Localizer frequency Press momentarily to enable disable the ident tone The large left knob COM VLOC GNS 530W is used to tune the megahertz MHz value to the left of the decimal point of the standby fre quency for the communications trans ceiver or the VOR Localizer receiver whichever is currently selected by the tuning cursor The small left knob PUSH C V GNS 530W is used to tune the kilohertz kHz value to the right of the decimal point of the standby frequency for the communications transceiver or the VLOC receiver lt 2 190 00357 00 Rev H eS GPS 500W whichever is currently selected by the tuning cursor Press this knob momentarily to toggle the tuning cursor between the COM
243. operation of the 500W series including powering up the unit changing frequencies entering data perform ing a simple direct to selecting IFR procedures and provides a limited introduction to using flight plans In addition this section brietly covers the detault navigation map and frequency pages available as part of the NAV page group These pages are used for most of your in flight navigation The Takeoff Tour assumes that the unit and anten nas have been properly installed and you have not changed any of the 500W series detault settings If you have changed any of the factory detault settings position format units of measure selectable fields etc the pictures shown here may not exactly match what you see on your 500W series unit Prior to using your 500W series unit for the first time we recom mend that you taxi to a location that is well away from GARMIN GARMIN TAKEOFF TOUR Power On buildings and other aircraft so the unit can collect satellite data without interruption Powering up the 500W series units The GNS 530W s power and COM volume are controlled using the COM power volume knob at the top left corner of the unit In the GPS 500W the knob controls only power Turning it clockwise turns unit power on and increases the COM radio volume After turning the unit on a Welcome Page is displayed while the unit performs a self test followed by copyright and software version information The Da
244. ort Page shown at left is one of eight pages available under the NRST group e Nearest Airport Page e Nearest Intersection Page e Nearest NDB Page e Nearest VOR Page e Nearest User Waypoints Page e Nearest ARTCC Page e Nearest FSS Page e Nearest Airspace Page 3 18 190 00357 00 Rev H remove the cursor trom the page Turn the large right knob to select the NRST page group as indicated by NRST appearing in the lower right corner of the screen To display a list of nearby airports turn the large right knob to select the NRST page group and if needed the small right knob to select the Nearest Airport Page To scroll through the list press the small right knob then turn the large right knob Turn the small right knob to select the desired NRST page TAKEOFF TOUR Nearest Airports Nearest Airport Page The Nearest Airport Page may be used in conjunc tion with the direct to key to quickly set a course to a nearby facility in an in flight emergency Selecting a nearby airport as a direct to destination overrides your flight plan or cancels a previously selected direct to You may examine both the communication frequencies and runway information directly from the Nearest Airport Page As discussed earlier for the NAVCOM Page you may also place any displayed frequency into the standby COM or VLOC field by destination you still have the option of returning to highlighting the trequency with the cursor
245. osition 3D NAV indicates that a 3 dimensional position is available 3D DIFF NAV indicates when a 3 dimensional position is available and differential corrections are being used The INTEG annunciator bottom left corner of the screen indicates that satellite coverage is insuffi cient to pass built in integrity monitoring tests 8 190 00357 00 Rev H TAKEOFF TOUR Selecting Com Nav Frequencies GNS 530W only Selecting Com Nav Frequencies While the GNS 530W is acquiring a position let s take a minute to dial in the active and standby frequencies you ll be using for the first phase of your flight The GNS 530W display is divided into separate windows or screen areas including a COM window VLOC window by default with VOR ident radial but selectable for other data including a traffic display and a GPS window which occupies the right 3 4 of the display COM Window Active Frequency COM Window Standby Frequency with tuning cursor VLOC Tuning Window and VLOC Ident Window Ident Window is user selectable Pushing the small left knob moves the tuning cursor back and forth between the COM and VLOC frequency windows To select the active frequency you must first enter the frequency in the standby field and use the COM or VLOC flip flop key to move it to the active field To change the standby communication COM or VLOC frequency 1 If the tuning cursor is not currently
246. ower on 5 Premature descent alerting 49 Preset frequency 190 Pressure 187 PROC 4 Procedures 4 17 134 Procedure turn 86 PTT 198 RAIM 176 180 213 Range 3 Re center CDI HSI needle 59 Remote frequency control 28 190 Rename waypoint 146 Restore defaults 77 Restoring factory settings 32 42 191 Roll steering 86 92 110 117 Runway 125 184 189 S Satellite status 7 54 SBAS 192 Scheduler 167 171 201 Searching sky 8 56 Selecting frequencies 9 Self test 6 Sequence 215 Setup page 181 192 Shortcuts 77 SIDs 17 83 134 Slant golf 214 Software version 176 180 Sort list 70 Specifications 212 Speed 187 Squelch 23 Standard package iii Standby frequency 9 STARs 17 83 224 Stormscope 202 Stuck microphone 28 Sunrise Sunset 167 170 Symbols 34 46 T Takeoff tour 1 Target altitude 197 TAS 167 Temperature 187 TERM 85 Terrain 44 Alerts 48 51 Symbols 46 Terrain database 181 Time 8 54 183 188 Timer 202 Traffic 189 202 Trip planning 167 169 Trip statistics 175 179 Troubleshooting 213 True airspeed 170 Turn advisory 29 Turn anticipation 216 U Units 183 186 UPS 187 User comment 66 User waypoint 139 145 155 UTC 188 Utility 175 UIM 183 187 V Vertical speed 187 195 VFOM 56 VHF com 212 View frequencies 37 VLOC 2 9 154 161 201 203 VNAV 4 193 197 Volume 2 23 190 00357 00 Rev H VOR 138 154 212 VSR 195 VIF 84 99 W WAAS approach ID 129 131 War
247. pears With Acti vate highlighted press ENT e Delete Flight Plan Crossfill Select Approach Crossfill allows you to transfer a direct to destina e Select Arrival tion the active flight plan including VNAV parameters e Select Departure any stored flight plan or user waypoints to a second e Remove Approach 400W series or 500W series Garmin unit e Remove Arrival e Remove Departure e Closest Point of Flight Plan e Parallel Track e Change Fields e Restore Defaults See Section 9 Aux Pages Flight Planning Crossfill Operation for additional details on using the Crossfill option 190 00357 00 Rev H 71 4 FLIGHT PLANS Active Flight Plan Options Manual GTN Crossfill Manual GTN Crossfill allows you to transfer user waypoints to a GIN unit or receive information from a GIN unit See Section 9 Aux Pages Flight Planning Manual GTN Crosshill Operation for additional details on using the Manual GTN Crossfill option Copy Flight Plan Copy Flight Plan copies the active flight plan to a Flight Plan Catalog location The copy function is useful for duplicating the active flight plan before making changes See the description on a previous page in the Flight Plan section Invert Flight Plan Invert Flight Plan reverses the active flight plan See the description on a previous page in the Flight Plan section Delete Flight Plan Delete Flight Plan allows you to remove all waypo
248. plan becomes locked until the proce dure is deleted from the flight plan or the correct database is installed For information on loading an approach de parture or arrival see Section 5 Procedures See Section 4 Flight Plans Active Flight Plan Options for instructions on saving and copying flight plans Can I file slant Golf G using my GPS Yes you may file your flight plan as G if your 500W series unit is an authorized IFR installation The 500W series is a TSO C146a Gamma 3 Class 3 authorized GPS navigator If you are flying en route you may fly G with an expired database only after you have verified all route waypoints Approaches may not be flown with an expired database See your approved Airplane Flight Manual Sup plement for more information 216 190 00357 00 Rev H What does the OBS key do and when do use it The OBS key is used to select manual OBS mode or to suspend automatic sequencing of waypoints Activat ing OBS mode as indicated by an Nyy annunciation directly above the OBS key holds your current active to waypoint as your navigation reference and prevents the GPS from sequencing to the next waypoint When OBS mode is cancelled automatic waypoint sequencing is selected and the 500W series unit automatically selects the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present active to waypoint NORMAL no OBS annunciator Automatic sequencing of Manual seque
249. point between two specified waypoints or for any programmed flight plan This item also displays the sunrise sunset times for your destination waypoint for the selected departure date 9 AUX PAGES Flight Planning The Trip Planning Page calculates desired track distance estimated time en route en route safe altitude and estimated time of arrival for a specified direct to point to point or flight plan A NOTE Point to point waypoints flight plans and or ground speeds default is current GPS calcu lated ground speed entered on the Fuel Planning Page automatically transfer to the Trip Planning Page and vice versa Density Alt TAS Winds indicates the theoretical altitude at which your aircraft per forms depending upon several variables including indicated altitude IND ALT barometric pressure BARO and total air temperature TAT the tem perature including the heating effect of speed read on a standard outside temperature gauge This item computes true airspeed TAS based upon the factors above and the calibrated airspeed CAS Also this menu option determines winds aloft the wind direction and speed and a head wind tail wind component based upon the calcu lated density altitude DEN ALT true airspeed aircraft heading HDG and ground speed 190 00357 00 Rev H 167 168 9 AUX PAGES Flight Planning DEHSITY ALT TAS 7 HIMDS Select the Density Alt TAS Winds op
250. press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Options window OR 1b From the Flight Plan Catalog press the small right knob to activate the cursor turn the large right knob to highlight the flight plan you wish to copy then press MENU to display the Flight Plan Catalog Options 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Copy 4 FLIGHT PLANS Flight Plan Catalog Options Activate Flight Plan Invert amp Activate FPL Create New Flight Plan Copy Flight Plan Delete All Flight Plans Sort List By Number Select Delete Flight Plan to remove the designated flight plan from memory From the Active Flight Plan Page Press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Options window Flight Plan and press ENT To delete a flight plan 3 By default the next empty catalog location is offered To select a different location turn the large right knob to select the flight plan OR number use the small and large right knobs to enter a different number and press ENT 1b 4 With Yes highlighted press ENT to copy the flight plan Deleting Flight Plans Once you are finished with a flight plan it can 2 easily be deleted trom the Flight Plan Catalog or the Active Flight Plan Page 3 Delete Flight Plan allows you to remove the selected flight plan from memory Deleting a flight plan does not delete the individual waypoints contained in the flight plan from the database or user waypoint memory 190 0
251. prior to actual use When in actual use carefully compare indications from the 500W series to all available navigation sources including the informa tion from other NAVAIDS visual sightings charts etc For safety always resolve any discrepancies before continu ing navigation CAUTION GPS receivers operate by receiving and decoding very low power radio signals broadcast by satellites It is possible that in some situations other radio equipment or electronic equipment used in close proximity to a GPS receiver may create electromagnetic interference EMI which may affect the ability of the GPS receiver to receive and decode the satellite signals In such event the interference may be reduced or eliminated by switching off the source of interference or moving the GPS receiver away from it CAUTION The electronic chart is an aid to naviga tion and is designed to facilitate the use of authorized government charts not replace them Land and water data is provided only as a general reference to your surroundings The positional accuracy of the land and water data is not of a precision suitable for use in navigation and it should not be used for navigation Only official government charts and notices contain all information needed for safe navigation and as always the user is responsible for their prudent use CAUTION The Terrain feature in units not equipped with TAWS is for supplemental awareness only The pilot crew is respo
252. ptions list Load into Active runway Many arrivals apply to all runways for FPL allows you to add the arrival procedure a particular airport as indicated by ALL to your flight plan for later use NOTE ALL may appear in the runway field indicat 3 Press ENT to select the Load into Active FPL ing the arrival procedure applies to all runways For option airports with parallel runways B may appear at the end of the runway designation to indicate the arrival 4 The Active Flight Plan Page appears Press FPL procedure applies to both runways to return to the Airport Arrival Page NOTE Loading an arrival procedure into the active 8 Press ENT To remove the flashing cursor press A flight plan does NOT automatically alter the active the small right knob flight plan leg or direct to navigation Once loaded the i arrival is simply placed at the end of the flight plan To Airport Arrival Page Options manually transition to a loaded arrival please see the The tallow g option is av ate oethe Airport procedure below an alternative method would be to remove the first occurrence of the destination airport Arrival Page by pressing the MENU key identifier Load into Active FPL allows you to load the r selected arrival into the active flight plan This is Select Next FPL Apt identical to loading an arrival procedure from the As described earlier in this section prosedunes E E Select Destination Apt To lo
253. push it into place flush with the face of the 500W series unit To remove the NavData card 1 Gently press on the tab using a slight motion toward the right at the front center of the NavData card This partially deploys the swing arm handle Press here to deploy handle 190 00357 00 Rev H 213 APPENDIX B Specifications Appendix B Specifications PHYSICAL Unit Size 6 25 W x 11 00 D x 4 60 H 159mm x 279mm x 117mm Unit Weight with tray 500W 6 8 pounds 3 08 kg 530W 8 2 pounds 3 72 kg POWER Input 500W 530W 14 28 Volts DC 530AW 28 Volts DC ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature 20 C to 55 C operating range 4 F to 131 F Humidity 95 non condensing Altitude 1 500 ft to 50 000 ft 457 m to 15 240 m GPS PERFORMANCE 15 parallel channel 12 3 WAAS Time to First Fix 1 min 45 sec Receiver Update Rate Five per second continuous Position lt 1 25 m RMS horizontal lt 2 m vertical with WAAS Dynamics 1000 kt maximum velocity VHF COM PERFORMANCE GNS 530W only Accuracy Channels 760 25 kHz spacing or 2280 8 33 kHz spacing Frequency Range 118 000 MHz to 136 992 MHz Transmit Power 10 watts minimum GNS 530W 16 watts minimum GNS 530AW VOR PERFORMANCE GNS 530W only 108 00 MHz to 117 95 MHz LOCALIZER PERFORMANCE GNS 530W only 108 10 MHz to 111 95 MHz GLIDESLOPE PERFORMANCE GNS 530W only 329 15 MHz to 335 00 MHz Frequency R
254. quenc ing of waypoints Whenever OBS mode is selected you may set the desired course to from a waypoint using the OBS Page or an external OBS selector on your HSI or CDI The message key MSG is used to view system messages and to alert you to important warnings and require 190 00357 00 Rev H FPL VNAV PROC ments when the MSG annunciator is displayed See Sections 12 and 9 for more information on messages and unit settings The flight plan key FPL allows you to create edit activate and invert flight plans as well as access approaches departures and arrivals A closest point to flight plan feature is also available from the flight plan key See Section 4 for more informa tion on flight plans The vertical navigation key VNAV allows you to create a three dimensional profile which guides you to a final target altitude at a specified location See Section 10 The procedures key PROC allows you to select approaches departures and arrivals trom your flight plan When using a flight plan available procedures for your departure and or arrival airport are offered automati cally Otherwise you may select the desired airport then the desired procedure Power On The Garmin 500W series offers you accurate navigational data and communication capability along with non precision and precision approach certifica tion in the IFR environment The Takeoff Tour is designed to familiarize you with the basic
255. r Runways Associated in HR with Arrival Fifth Page in WPT Group To scroll through the available arrivals 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the ARRIVAL procedure name field APT 123 008 115 40 kerros BONVLA me d HELNS4 REEDI i EVO RBONVE DS 68 58 1 With the cursor on the ARRIVAL field turn the small right knob to display a list of avail able arrival procedures 132 190 00357 00 Rev H Turn the small right knob to display a window of available arrivals for the selected airport Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired arrival Press ENT The cursor moves to the transitions TRANS field Turn the small right knob to display a window of available transitions Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired transi tion With the cursor on the TRANS field turn the small right knob to display a list of avail able transitions Press ENT The cursor moves to the runway field Turn the small right knob to display a window of available runways Continue turn ing the small right knob to select the desired runway 6 WPT PAGES Airport Arrivals sees Load into Active FPL Select Next FPL Apt Select Destination Apt With the RUNWAY field highlighted turn From the Airport Arrival Page press MENU the small right knob to select the desired to display an o
256. r more Waypoints that could not be found in the navigation data base or imported into the User Database User waypoint database full Not all waypoints loaded appended to the import results text One or more of the User Waypoints in the Flight Plan file were not created because the unit s User Database is full or became full during the import operation User waypoint s renamed appended to the import results text One or more of the User Waypoints in the Flight Plan file was renamed during the import operation Verify FPL before use appended to the import results text One or more of the User Waypoints or Route Points to be imported were modified in some way one or more of messages f through i were displayed and changes should be verified before using the flight plan for navigation 206 190 00357 00 Rev H Abbreviations The following is a list of abbreviations and acronyms used on the 500W series unit and their meanings ACTV ALT APR APT ARSPC ARTCC ARVL AUX AVGAS AVIN BARO BRG oC C V CAS CDI CLR COM CRSR CTA CTAF CTR Active Altitude Approach Airport Airspace Air Route Traffic Control Center Arrival Auxiliary Aviation grade Gasoline Aviation Barometric setting Bearing To Degree Celsius COM VLOC Calibrated Airspeed Course Deviation Indicator Clear Communications T
257. ransceiver Cursor ICAO Control Area Common Traffic Advisory Frequency Center see ARTCC CUM DB DEN DEP DEPT DIS DME DP DTK EFF ELEV ENDUR ENR ENT EPU ESA ETA ETE OF L FAF FDE FF FIR FLTA FOB 190 00357 00 Rev H 12 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS Cumulative Database Density Departure Departure guidance Distance Distance Measuring Equipment Departure Procedure Desired Track Efficiency Elevation Endurance En Route Enter Estimated Position Uncertainty En Route Safe Altitude Estimated Time of Arrival Estimated Time En Route Degrees Fahrenheit Final Approach Fix Fault Detection and Exclusion Fuel Flow Flight Information Region Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance Fuel On Board 207 208 12 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS FPL fpm FREQ FSS ft G S gl GPS GS HAL HDG HFOM hg HPL HWY IAF ID ig ILS IND INT INTEG ITI ke Flight Plan Feet Per Minute Frequency Flight Service Station Feet Glideslope Gallons Global Positioning System Ground Speed Horizontal Alarm Limit Heading Horizontal Figure of Merit Inches of Mercury Horizontal Protection Level Highway Intermediate Approach Fix Identifier Imperial G
258. ranty iv Waypoints 121 Waypoint alert 29 WGS 84 183 Winds 167 170 Winds aloft 170 Wind vector 39 40 Wx broadcast 137 138 190 00357 00 Rev H APPENDIX D Index 225 APPENDIX D Index Blank Page 226 190 00357 00 Rev H A GARMIN 2012 Garmin Corporation Garmin International Inc 1200 East 151 Street Olathe Kansas 66062 U S A Tel 913 397 8200 or 866 739 5687 Fax 913 397 8282 Garmin AT Inc 2345 Turner Rd S E Salem Oregon 97302 U S A Tel 503 581 8101 or 800 525 6726 Fax 503 364 2138 Garmin Europe Ltd Liberty House Bulls Copse Road Hounsdown Business Park Southampton SO40 ORB U K Tel 44 0 870 850 1243 Fax 44 0 238 052 4004 Garmin Corporation No 68 Zhangshu 2 Road Xizhi Dist New Taipei City 221 Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2642 9199 Fax 886 2 2642 9099 Garmin Singapore Pte Ltd 46 East Coast Road 05 06 Eastgate Singapore 428766 Tel 65 63480378 Fax 65 63480278 www garmin com https fly garmin com fly garmin Part Number 190 00357 00 Rev H
259. re ap pears above the OBS key NOTE If there is a valid baro corrected pressure altitude input the SUSP is not annunciated and the leg sequences automatically when the altitude 5 000 ft is reached 3 Flythe outbound course keeping the CDI needle centered The Map Page depicts the flight path extending trom PMD VOR to 5 000 feet 4 Upon reaching the desired altitude 5000 press the OBS key to return to automatic leg sequencing Confirm that SUSP no longer appears directly above the OBS key Upon reaching the desired altitude press OBS to return to automatic leg sequencing An alert message Next DTK 133 in x sec appears guiding you to the inbound course 5 An alert Next DTK 133 in x sec appears guiding you to the inbound course The actual desired track DTK depends on your ground 190 00357 00 Rev H 5 PROCEDURES Course From Fix Legs speed and distance from PMD VOR Intercept and fly the inbound course keeping the CDI needle centered As you approach PMD VOR the missed approach holding point an alert message in the lower right hand corner of the screen recommends the holding pattern entry proce dure Hold parallel As you fly the holding pattern a timer appears on the Default NAV Page The timer automatically resets on each outbound and inbound portion of the holding pattern An alert message recommends the hold ing pattern entry procedure e g Hold parallel
260. re the page to your own preferences and current navigation needs Sky View Current GPS Receiver Signal of satellite UTC Time Status Horizontal Figure Strength Bars positions of Merit and Verti cal Figure of Merit Estimated Posi tion Uncertainty Satellite acquired fix and has differ T Fii Vi fojojele aa wee corrections piste Satellite Numbers INTEG Annunciator iri i Current Page in NAV Excluded Acquiring Satellite 8 flagged when lt tellite Satellite acquired Group pe rot not ready and used for page position valid for ition fi depends on options Orue Resumen J See 400W S00W Series Display Interfaces Pilot s Guide Addendum The Satellite Status Page is helpful in troubleshoot ing weak or missing signal levels due to poor satellite coverage or installation problems You may wish to refer to this page occasionally to monitor GPS receiver performance and establish a normal pattern for system operation Should problems occur at a later date you may find it helpful to have an established baseline from which to compare As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites a signal strength bar appears for each satellite in view with the appropriate satellite number 01 32 WAAS satel lites will have higher numbers underneath each bar The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages e No signal strength bars the receiver is looking for the satellites indicated TER T
261. rees minutes seconds MGRS or UTM UPS e Elevation In feet or meters Fuel For public use airports the available fuel type s are Avgas 80 87 100LL 100 130 Mogas Jet or None e Approach Best available approach ILS MLS LOC LDA SDE GPS VOR RNAV RNV LORAN LOR NDB TACAN TCN Helicopter HEL or VFR 124 190 00357 00 Rev H Airport Location Page Options Select Next FPL Apt Selecting the Next Airport page menu option allows you to display the next waypoint in the flight plan Select Next FPL Apt Select Destination Apt HPT I Select Select Next FPL Apt to display the next airport in the flight plan Select Destination Apt Selecting the Destination Airport page menu option allows you to display the Destination waypoint in the flight plan Select Next FPL Apt Select Destination Apt HPT i Select Select Destination Apt to display the destination airport of the flight plan 6 WPT PAGES Airport Runways Airport Runway Page The Airport Runway Page displays runway des ignations length surface type and lighting for the selected airport A map image of the runway layout and surrounding area is also displayed on the Airport Runway Page The map image scale appears in the lower left corner and is adjustable using the RNG key For airports with multiple runways information for each runway is available Identifier Symbol um
262. reporting that it has a problem with receiving ADS B data The unit may continue to function but the traffic picture may be degraded GDL 88 Traffic Failure The GDL 88 is reporting that is has a problem processing all traffic information The trat fic function of the GDL 88 is unavailable GDL 88 ADS B traffic has failed or GDL 88 Traffic Failure The GDL 88 is reporting that it has a problem processing ADS B traffic data The ADS B traffic picture may be degraded GDL 88 Traffic Alerting has failed or GDL 88 CSA Fail ure The GDL 88 is reporting that the CSA application has failed Traffic alerting on ADS B traffic is unavailable GDL 88 Connection has been lost The GNS unit cannot communicatie with the datalink Data from the data link will not be available GDL 88 ADS B transmit has failed The GDL 88 is unable to transmit If the problem persists contact your Garmin dealer for service GDL 88 ADS B is not transmitting position The GDL 88 is not transmitting If the problem persists contact your Garmin dealer for service GDL 88 ADS B fault Check GDL 88 Status Page A fault has been detected Check the GDL 88 Status page in Aux mode GPS is not responding Check GPS antenna Inter nal system to system communication between the main processor and the GPS receiver has failed Operational status of the GPS receiver is unknown and the unit should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service aft
263. ress ENT and turn the large right knob to highlight the new approach you want to fly Press ENT to select the approach then select the desired transition Finally highlight Activate at the bottom right corner of the screen and press ENT to acti vate the new approach To activate a new approach to a different airport press direct to and select the desired airport using the small and large right knobs Press ENT to accept the selected airport then follow the steps in the preceding paragraph to select an approach for the new airport See Section 5 for more information on selecting and activating approaches NOTE Do not attempt to reactivate the same ap proach you re currently on prior to crossing the missed approach point MAP If you attempt to do so an alert message Are you sure you want to discontinue the current approach appears If you still proceed with reactivating the ap proach the 500W series unit directs you back to the transition waypoint and does NOT take into consideration any missed approach procedures 220 190 00357 00 Rev H Index Symbols 3D navigation 8 55 56 A Abbreviations 124 126 128 136 137 138 140 197 205 Accessories iii Acquiring satellites 8 56 Activate flight plan 22 Activate leg 78 Activating flight plans 67 Active flight plan 21 70 Active leg 13 31 71 89 90 94 95 100 110 111 117 Airport Approach 10 129 130 214 Arrival 132 Departure 134 Finding 122 Fr
264. ress ENT to select this option 3 Use the large right knob to highlight the data field you wish to change 4 Turn the small right knob to display the list of available data items Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired data item trom the list ETA Est Time ryl ETE Est Time Enrte GS Ground Speed MSA Hin Safe Alt TKE Track Ang Err TRK Track VSR Vert Spd Reqd WPT Active Wpt Seen 1K Cross Track Err Once Change Fields is selected use the large right knob to select the field you wish to change and the small right knob to select the new data type 5 Press ENT to select the desired data item and return to the Default NAV Page 6 Press the small right knob to remove the cursor from the page Restoring Factory Settings You can also quickly return all data field settings to their original factory settings Enuble Auto oom Change Fields Restore Defaults The Restore Defaults option returns all data fields to their original factory settings To restore all four selectable data fields to factory default settings 1 Starting with the Default NAV Page press the MENU key to display an options menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the Restore Defaults option and press ENT Dual Unit Considerations Crossfill A Crossfill option is provided from the Default NAV Page This option allows you to transfer a direct to destinat
265. ress the Approach button on the autopilot to switch it to Approach mode Your autopilot will now use guidance from the 500W series unit for the approach 6 WPT PAGES WPT Page Group Section 6 To quickly select a WPT page WPT Pages 1 From any page press and hold CLR to select the Default NAV Page You may skip this step WPT Page Group oe if you are already viewing any of the main Section 2 introduced the 500W series unit main page groups NAV WPT AUX NRST and pages described each page in the NAV group This second 2 Turn the large right knob to select the WPT page group WPT provides information for the page group WPT appears in the lower right thousands of airports VORs NDBs intersections corner of the screen runways frequencies and procedures stored on 3 Turn the small right knob to select the desired your Jeppesen NavData card A WPT page is also WPT page provided to display information for up to 1 000 user created waypoints The WPT page group includes ten pages While viewing any WPT page turn the small right knob to select a different WPT page The first six pages provide detailed information for the selected airport loca tion runways frequencies approaches arrivals and departures The last four pages provide information for intersections NDBs VORs and user created waypoints NAV WPT AUX NRST 5 available pages 10 available pages 3 available pages 8 available pages see Section 2
266. ressed in time and based upon a known fuel consumption flow rate MSA minimum safe altitude Used Grid Mini mum Off route Altitudes Grid MORAs to deter mine a safe altitude within ten miles of your present position Grid MORAs are one degree latitude by one degree longitude in size and clear all reference points within the grid by 1000 feet in areas where the highest reference point is 5000 feet MSL or lower If the high est reference point is above 5000 feet the Grid MORA clears the highest reference point by 2000 feet TKE track angle error The angle difference between the desired track and your current track An arrow indicates the proper direction to turn to reduce TKE to zero TIME AND DISTANCE TO PROFILE CURRENT ALTITUDE AND POSITION DISTANCE TO TARGET TRK track The direction of movement relative to a ground position Also referred to as ground track VSR vertical speed required The vertical speed necessary to descend from current position and altitude to a defined target position and altitude based upon your current ground speed XTK crosstrack error The distance you are off a desired course in either direction left or right TARGET ALTITUDE AND POSITION Y AIRPORT 212 190 00357 00 Rev H APPENDIX A FW Dyck ts In Gre ce OLX Appendix A 2 Turn the swing arm handle outward until it NavData Card Use locks into place perpendicular to the face of
267. rge right knob to highlight Restore Defaults and press ENT 190 00357 00 Rev H 197 Section 11 Fault Detection and Exclusion FDE Interface Fault Detection and Exclusion FDE The Garmin 500W series software incorporates a Fault Detection and Exclusion FDE algorithm thus providing a basis for approval per FAA Notice N8110 60 requirements for GPS as a Primary Means of Navigation for Oceanic Remote Operations The FDE consists of two distinct features fault detection and fault exclusion The fault detection feature detects the presence of an unacceptably large pseudorange error for a satellite and presumably position error for a given mode of flight Upon detec tion fault exclusion follows and excludes the source of the unacceptably large pseudorange error thereby allowing navigation to return to normal performance without an interruption in service To enhance safety FDE functionality is provided for other phases of flight non precision approach terminal en route The FDE functionality for non oceanic flight phases complies with missed alert probability false alert probability and failed exclusion probability specified by DO 229C TSO C146a Pre departure Verification of FDE An FDE prediction must be performed prior to departure for a flight plan involving Oceanic Remote operation where GPS is to be the sole source of navigation Prior to departure the operator must use the FDE prediction program
268. right knob to select the desired procedure and press ENT Press ENT The cursor moves to the transitions TRANS field Turn the small right knob to display a window of available transitions Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired transition or select VECTORS for guidance only along the final course segment of the approach APT 120 206 117 88 TOP i 215 rudiL VECTORS 117 Le With the cursor on the TRANS field turn the small right knob to select the desired transition Select VECTORS for guidance only along the final course segment of the approach Press ENT To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob 129 6 WPT PAGES Airport Approach Options NOTE Not all approaches in the database are ap Airport Approach Page Options proved for GPS use As you select an approach a Sp designation to the right of the procedure name The following options are available tor the Airport indicates the procedure can be flown using the GPS re Approach Page by pressing the MENU key ceiver Some procedures do not have this designation meaning the GPS receiver may be used for supple Load into Active FPL allows you to load the mental navigation guidance only ILS approaches for selected approach into the active flight plan example must be flown by tuning the VLOC receiver to without activating it This performs the same the proper frequency and coupling
269. rners Bearing indicator to the current active TO waypoint Active Leg of Flight Plan Course Deviation or Direct to Destination Indicator CDI DEFAULT NAV PAGE TAKEOFF TOUR Default NAV Page To change the data fields in the corners of the Default NAV Page 1 Press MENU with the Map Page displayed E Auta Zogi Chonan Fields Restore Defaults The data fields on the Default NAV Page may be custom tailored to your prefer ences A menu selection is provided to Change Fields 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Change Fields and press ENT 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the data field you wish to change Turn the small right knob to select the type of data you want to appear on this field and press ENT 135375 ETA Est Timo Arvi ETE Est Time Enrto 1735 165 Grourd Seed HSA Hin Safe Alt TEE Trock Ang Err TRK Track VSR Vert Spd Road WPT Active Wp The large right knob is used to select the data field you wish to change Then use the small right knob to display a list of data options and select the desired data Item 5 Press the small right knob to remove the Cursor 190 00357 00 Rev H 13 TAKEOFF TOUR Map Page Map Page The Map Page displays your present position using an airplane symbol relative to nearby airports VORs NDBs intersections user waypoints and airspace boundaries and your route
270. rs to the final course segment of the approach and thus provides navigation guidance to intercept this final course Turn the large right knob to highlight Load or Activate and press ENT Load adds the procedure to the flight plan without imme diately using it for navigation guidance This allows you to continue navigating the original flight plan but keeps the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activa tion when needed 163 8 VLOC RECEIVER CDI Key APT 1 35 325 Ho6A 35h vey Activate HPT For VOR and ILS approaches the standby field of the VLOC window is automatically tuned to the proper frequency To activate the frequency press the VLOC flip flop key To display VLOC course information on the external CDI or HSI press CDI and verity that VLOC is displayed at the bottom left corner of the screen directly above the CDI key For non GPS approaches ILS and VOR a reminder window appears indicating that GPS guidance on such approaches is strictly for monitoring only use the VLOC receivers and external CDI or HSI for primary navigation To confirm this reminder highlight Yes and press ENT CDI Key The GNS 530Ws CDI key is used to couple the GPS or VLOC receiver to the external CDI or HSD When the external CDI or HSI is connected to the GPS receiver GPS appears at the bottom left corner of the page directly above t
271. rsor from the COM window TAKEOFF TOUR Page Groups Page Groups Large right knob to change page groups PF I AUX Group NAV Group WPT Group Default NAV a meet i lG Airport Frequency Small right knob to select pages within the group _ 10 190 00357 00 Rev H Small right knob to select pages within the group TAKEOFF TOUR Page Groups Large right knob to change page groups maen L eee Z FPL Group VNAV Press FLP Press VNAV NRST Group sh 2 125 os IE 16 iE 1 f HG T i i HE E TE TE Hic jp o o E ial DG PROC mn rene Press PROC Mi ray PET a Procedures _ 7 NOTE The number of NAV pages avail able vary depending on the installation of options See 400W 500W Series Dis play Interfaces Pilot s Guide Addendums Selection of any main page is performed using the large and small right knobs The large right knob selects the page group NAV WPT AUX or NRST The small right knob selects the desired page within a group To quickly select the Default NAV page Press and hold CLR Nearest User Wpt 190 00357 00 Rev H 11 TAKEOFF TOUR NAV Pages NAV Pages The map page is one of five or more pages avail able under the NAV group The previous page shows the organization of the main page groups Addition ally page groups for flight plans procedures and vertical navigation are available
272. rt Frequency Page Options Select Next FPL Apt As described earlier in this section Select Destination Apt As described earlier in this section 128 190 00357 00 Rev H Airport Approach Page The Airport Approach Page shows the available approach procedures for the selected airport Where multiple initial approach fixes IAFs and feeder routes are available that information may also be displayed A map image provides a layout diagram for each approach and transition If a WAAS approach has been selected the WAAS approach ID is displayed in the top left corner of the map The approach service level is shown in the lower right corner of the map Service level annunciations available are LP LPV L VNAV LNAV V or LNAV WAAS approach and Type PED yp Map Image Fourth Page in a WPT Identifier Symbol Approach Procedure Name Transitions IAFs Feeder Routes and 2 Vectors to Final ee WAAS service level Group To scroll through the available approaches and transitions 1 Press the small right knob to activate the cursor Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the APPROACH procedure name field Turn the small right knob to display a window of available approaches for the selected airport Continue turning the small right knob to select the desired approach 190 00357 00 Rev H 6 WPT PAGES Airport Approaches 3 With the cursor on the APPROACH name field turn the small
273. s allows you to continue navigating the original flight plan but keeps the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed to later activate a departure or arrival 6 For VLOC based precision approaches and some non precision approaches a reminder window appears indicating that GPS guidance on such approaches is strictly for monitoring only use the VLOC receiver and external CDI or HSI for primary navigation To confirm this reminder highlight Yes and press ENT 190 00357 00 Rev H 83 5 PROCEDURES Activating Approaches Not all approaches in the database are approved for GPS use As you select an approach a GPS designa tion to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure can be flown using the GPS receiver Some procedures do not have this designation meaning that the GPS receiver may be used for supplemental naviga tion guidance only ILS approaches for example must be flown by tuning the VLOC receiver to the proper frequency and coupling the VLOC receiver to the external CDI or HSI Once an approach is selected it may be activated for navigation from the Procedures Page Activating the approach overrides the en route portion of the active flight plan proceeding directly to the approach portion for a full approach directly to the initial approach fix To activate an approach which was previously loaded RH27 FEEH A i i a
274. s used to erase information or cancel an entry Press and hold this key to immediately display the Default Navigation Page regardless of the page that is cur rently displayed mm The enter key ENT is used to approve an operation or complete data entry It is also used to confirm Data is entered using the large and small information such as the Database right knobs Experiment with them to be Page during power on come efficient at entering data This greatly reduces the amount of time spent operating The large right knob GPS is used the 500W series unit in flight to select between the various page groups NAV WPT AUX or NRST 190 00357 00 Rev H 3 TAKEOFF TOUR Key and Knob Functions GPS 500W COM FYLOC om u Ep GV i Ta sn f A GNS 530W Bottom Row Keys NRST CDI The nearest key NRST GPS 500W displays the Nearest Airports page Then turning the small right knob steps through the NRST pages The CDI key GNS 530W is used to toggle the navigation source GPS or VLOC which provides output to an external HSI or CDI The OBS key is used to select manual or automatic sequencing of waypoints Pressing this key selects OBS mode which retains the current active to waypoint as your naviga tion reference even after passing the waypoint i e prevents sequencing to the next waypoint Pressing the OBS key again returns to normal operation with automatic se
275. s window appears Turn the large right knob to select the desired waypoint and press ENT To remove the flashing cursor press the small right knob 123 6 WPT PAGES Airport Location Airport Location Page Radar Radar coverage Yes or No The Airport Location Page displays the latitude e Airspace Control environment Class C CTA TMA TRSA Class B or none longitude and elevation of the selected airport The Airport Location Page also displays facility name and location as well as fuel availability best available instrument approach radar coverage and airspace type Identifier Symbol Facility Name and and Type Location City Field Elevation Available Fuels Radar Availability e Airspace Type Airport Location Page indicating radar Yer coverage and airspace type The Airport Loca First Page in tion Page also indicates the best available WPT Group approach for the selected airport To see Latitude Longitude Best Available Approach additional approach information select the Position and Radar Coverage Airport Approach Page NOTE Upon active navigation changes the active The following descriptions and abbreviations are A used destination airport is used as the default airport on the Iype Usage type Public Military WPT pages Manual selection of the destination airport Heliport or Private is available from the page menu e Position _ Latitude Longitude degrees min utes or deg
276. scroll bar along the right hand side of the screen indicates the part of the list that is currently being displayed DEPARTURE GROUND Highlight Info adjacent to the desired frequency and press ENT to display usage restrictions for the corresponding frequency The scroll bar along the right hand side of the page indicates the length of the 3 To return to the NAVCOM Page press ENT NAVCOM frequency list and what portion of the list is currently being displayed 3 Toplace a frequency in the standby field of the COM or VLOC window highlight the desired frequency using the large right knob and press ENT Available in the GNS 530W only Some listed frequencies may include designations for limited usage as follows TX transmit only RX receive only PT part time frequency If a listed frequency has sector or altitude restric tions the frequency is preceded by an Info designa tion 190 00357 00 Rev H 53 2 NAV PAGES Satellite Status Page Satellite Status Page The Satellite Status Page the last NAV page provides a visual reference of GPS receiver functions including current satellite coverage GPS receiver status position accuracy and displays your present position by default in latitude and longitude and altitude The Satellite Status Page also displays the cur rent UTC time at the bottom center of the page The altitude field ALT is user selectable to configu
277. se into the CDI or HSI using the OBS Knob and initiate a standard rate turn to this course heading 8 When within 45 of the final approach course and the FAF is the TO waypoint the 500W series unit switches trom terminal mode to approach mode CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 NM full scale deflection to either 0 3 NM or 2 full scale deflection whichever is less at the FAF The change occurs over 2 NM and is completed by the FAF DO NOT USE FOR NAVIGATION pap D 25G 10 As you cross the FAF the destination sequences to the MAP RW22 the runway threshold With the needle centered fly toward the MAP observing the altitude minimums dictated by the approach plate When viewing the Map Page you ll note that the final course segment is displayed in magenta the active leg of the flight plan always appears in magenta and a dashed line extends the course beyond the MAP 9 As you approach the FAF a waypoint alert in the lower right corner Right to 214 in x sec appears Select this course on the CDI or HSI using the OBS knob and turn to the final course segment FAF to MAP heading As you approach the FAF a Right to 214 in x sec waypoint alert appears in the lower right corner of the screen 98 190 00357 00 Rev H 11 12 As you approach the MAP a waypoint alert Arriving at waypoint appears in the lower right corner of the screen CDI scaling continues to tighten from 0
278. se the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the desired user waypoint Press ENT when finished The flashing cursor moves to the CROSS SIDE field Turn the small right knob to select To or From and press ENT From Initiate Transfer The flashing cursor moves to the Initiate Transfer confirmation field Press ENT to transfer the selected data 9 AUX PAGES Utility Page To perform Manual GTN Crossfill The Manual GTN Crossfill Function allows the GNS 400W 500W series unit to manually send all User waypoints to the connected GTN unit or receive infor mation from a GTN unit The information received from the GTN unit includes the following e Active Waypoint Leg e Active Flight Plan e Direct Io Waypoint Suspend OBS Status NOTE The databases of the 400 500 series and the 400W 500W are incompatible so you may not mix systems NOTE Manual GTN Crossfill requires the 4OOW 500W series unit to have the same Jeppesen NavData database cycle number as the GTN unit NOTE Crossfill and Manual GTN Crossfill can not be configured to be present at the same time The chosen feature is configured by the installer for your installa tion NOTE Ensure that the GTN unit has Auto GNS Crossfill enabled Manual GTN Crossfill is a feature that will keep the GNS system in syne with a flight plan that is being used on the GIN system The GTN will not automatically keep its fl
279. set mode Pwr on records a departure time when the 500W series unit is turned on GS gt 30kt records a departure time once the GPS computed ground speed exceeds 30 knots Power on The 500W series unit can be configured to record the departure time when the unit is powered on or when your ground speed exceeds 30 knots In the case of a helicopter installation the Departure Criteria is Power on or In air FLIGHT TIHERS 4 Press ENT when finished 5 To reset the departure time turn the large right knob to highlight Reset and press ENT This will reset the departure time to the current time To view use or reset total trip time 1 Select Flight Timers from the Utility Page 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight the reset mode field under Total Trip Time The reset mode field indicates Pwr on or GS gt 30kt 3 Turnthe small right knob to select the desired reset mode Pwr on resets trip time to zero hours minutes seconds each time the 500W series unit is turned on GS gt 30kt resets trip time to zero after power on and when the GPS computed ground speed exceeds 30 knots Power on Turn the small right knob to select when the trip timer resets each time the 500W series unit is powered on or when ground speed exceeds 30 knots In the case of a helicopter installation the Total Trip Criteria is Power on or In air 4 Press ENT w
280. sory Lett or Right to now appears in the lower right corner of the screen when you are to begin the turn Set the HSI to the next DTK value and begin the turn 3 The To From indicator on the HSI or CDI flips momentarily to indicate that you have crossed the midpoint of the turn For more information on waypoint alerts and turn advisories see Section 5 Left to 209 in 9 sec When does the CDI scale change and what does it change to The CDI scale is 1 0 NM terminal mode within 31 NM of the departure airport The CDI will smoothly scale to 2 0 NM en route mode once beyond 31 NM from the departure airport The unit begins a smooth CDI scale transition from the 2 0 NM en route mode to the 1 0 NM terminal mode scale within 31 NM from the destination airport When within 45 of the final approach course and the FAF is the TO waypoint the 500W series unit switches from ter 218 190 00357 00 Rev H minal mode to approach mode CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 NM full scale deflection to either 0 3 NM or 2 full scale deflection whichever is less at the FAE The scal ing change occurs gradually over a 2 NM distance and is completed before crossing the FAF If Vectors to Final is selected the unit provides CDI scaling appropriate to the approach which is typically 2 degrees angular from the origin of the approach This an gular course deviation reaches the max 1 NM deviation at approximately 27 NM from the M
281. space within 10 minutes This message is automatically disabled within 30 NM of an arrival airport when an approach is loaded Airspace near and ahead Your GPS calculated position is within 2 NM of the boundary of a special use airspace and your course is projected to enter the airspace This message is automatically disabled within 30 NM of an arrival airport when an approach is loaded All data referenced to True North The unit does not have a valid aviation database so it cannot compute mag netic variation 12 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS Approach downgraded Use LNAV minima This message will occur 60 seconds prior to the FAF if flying LNAV V L VNAV LP or LPV approaches and WAAS integrity parameters have fallen below minimal limits As a result vertical guidance has been discontinued and the LP LPV LNAV V or L VNAV approach you were flying has been downgraded Approach is not active The approach could not transi tion to active at 2 NM or closer to the FAE Verify that SUSP DOES NOT appear directly above the OBS key indicating the auto waypoint sequencing is suspended This message also appears if Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM has determined that sufficient GPS satellite coverage DOES NOT exist for the phase of flight you are currently in along with a RAIM not available from FAF to MAP message Approaching target altitude The current GPS c
282. speed GS active to from waypoints only active to for a direct to destination and esti mated time en route A graphic course deviation indicator CDI also appears at the bottom of the page Unlike the angular limits on a CDI coupled to a VOR or ILS receiver full scale limits for this CDI are defined by a GPS derived distance 2 0 1 0 or 0 3 NM By detault the CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the current phase of flight en route terminal area or approach NOTE Approaching the FAF the GNS 500W series unit automatically rescales in an angular fashion This allows the LPV approach to be flown identically to a standard ILS At 2 0 NM from the FAF CDI scaling is tightened from 1 0 to the angular full scale deflection defined for the approach You may also manually select the desired scale set ting as outlined in Section 9 The graphic CDI shows your position at the center of the indicator relative to the desired course the moving course deviation needle As with a traditional mechanical CDI when you re off course simply steer toward the needle The TO FROM arrow in the center of the scale indicates whether you are heading to the waypoint an up arrow or if you have passed the waypoint a down arrow The following symbols are used on the Default NAV Page directly above the graphic CDI to depict the active leg of a flight plan or direct to Direct To a Waypoint Course to a
283. splayed on the satellite status page Regardless of erore the satellite may be used tor navigation soli the EPU value displayed the INTEG annunciation is the signal strength bar Once the GPS receiver has deter controlling indication for determining the integrity of mined your position the 500W series unit indicates the GPS navigation solution your position altitude track and ground speed The GPS receiver status field also displays the following messages under the appropriate conditions e Searching Sky The GPS receiver is searching the sky for ANY vis ible satellites You are also informed of this status with a Searching the Sky message e Acquiring Sat The GPS receiver is acquiring satellites for naviga tion In this mode the receiver uses satellite orbital data collected continuously from the satellites and last known position to determine the satellites that should be in view e 3D Navigation The GPS receiver is in 3D navigation mode and computes altitude using satellite data 3D Differential Navigation The GPS receiver is in 3D navigation mode and differential corrections are being used The Satellite Status Page also indicates the accu racy of the position fix using Horizontal Figure of Merit HFOM Vertical Figure of Merit VFOM and Estimated Position Uncertainty EPU HFOM and VFOM represent the 95 confidence levels in hori zontal and vertical accuracy The lowest numbers are t
284. supplied with the 400W 500W series Trainer CD to demonstrate that there are no outages in the capability to navigate on the specified route of flight the FDE prediction program determines whether the GPS constellation is robust enough to provide a navigation solution for the specified route of flight Please refer to the instruc tions included in the Garmin 400W 500W series Training CD for complete details on using the FDE prediction program 198 190 00357 00 Rev H Section 12 Messages Abbreviations amp Nav Terms Messages The 500W series unit uses a flashing MSG annun ciator at the bottom of the screen directly above the MSG key to alert you of any important information or warnings While most messages are advisory in nature warning mes sages may require your intervention Whenever the MSG annunciator flashes press the MSG key to display the message when pilot workload allows Press MSG again to return to the previous page The following is a list of available messages and their mean ings ABORT APPROACH Loss of Navigation Execute missed approach using other navigation equipment Airport terrain database integrity error The 500W series unit has detected a problem with a database on the TAWS Terrain data card The data is not usable and the card should be returned to your Garmin dealer Airspace ahead less than 10 minutes Your GPS calculated course is projected to enter a special use air
285. surface types so that the corresponding airports do not appear on the list You may wish to use this feature to exclude seaplane bases or runway lengths which would be difficult or impossible to land upon The Nearest Airport Page may be used to quickly tune the COM transceiver GNS 530W only to a nearby airport The selected frequency is placed in the standby field of the COM window and activated using the COM flip flop key Airport Identifier Symbol Bearing To and Distance To Tower or CIAF Frequency and Scroll Bar Best Available Approach First Page in NRST Group 152 190 00357 00 Rev H Longest Runway 4 To quickly tune the common traffic advisory fre quency CTAF from the Nearest Airport Page GNS 530W only 1 2 Select the Nearest Airport Page Press the small right knob to activate the cursor Turn the large right knob to scroll through the list highlighting the COM frequency associated with the desired airport To quickly tune to a frequency on the Nearest Airport Page highlight the desired frequency and press ENT Press ENT to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the COM window Press the COM flip flop key to activate the selected frequency Press the COM flip flop key to activate the selected frequency 6 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor Additional communication frequencies runway information and more is available from the Near
286. t VOR NDB intersection or na ne i A i E another user waypoint Press ENT to accept ee ee eee eee the selected identifier to accept the selected position 5 The cursor moves to the Modify action field Press ENT to modify the waypoint 190 00357 00 Rev H 143 6 WPT PAGES User Waypoint Options The cursor moves to the radial RAD field Use the small and large right knobs to change the radial from the reference waypoint if desired Press ENT to accept the selected radial Modify With the radial RAD field highlighted use the small and large right knobs to enter a new radial from the reference waypoint The cursor moves to the distance DIS field Use the small and large right knobs to change the distance trom the reference waypoint to the new user waypoint if desired Press ENT to accept the selected distance The cursor moves to the Modify action field Press ENT to modity the waypoint Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor NOTE If you attempt to modify or delete a way point which is currently a direct to waypoint or the current from or to waypoint in the active flight plan the 500W series unit alerts you with a Can t change an active waypoint or Waypoint is active and can t be deleted message You must first cancel the direct to or remove the waypoint s from the active flight plan before modifying or deleting the waypoint s User Waypo
287. t Alert Present Position Procedure s Province Parallel Track PWR RAD RAIM REF REQ RESTRICTD RNG RTC RX SBAS SID Sml SPD SQ SRFC STAR SUA SUSP es TACAN TAS TAT TEMP TER TERM 190 00357 00 Rev H 12 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS Power Radial Receiver Autonomous Integrity Moni toring Reference Required Requirements Restricted Range Required Terrain Clearance Receive Space Based Augmentation System Standard Instrument Departure Small Speed Squelch Surface Standard Terminal Arrival Route Special Use Airspace Waypoint Sequencing Suspended Degrees True Tactical Air Navigation True Airspeed Total Air Temperature Temperature Terrain Terminal 209 12 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS TKE Track Angle Error TMA ICAO Terminal Control Area WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System TRANS Transition WPT Waypoint TRFC Traffic WX Weather TRK Track also Ground Track Angle TRSA Terminal Radar Service Area XTK Crosstrack Error twr Tower TX Transmit uni Unicom UTC Coordinated Universal Time also GMT or zulu UTM UPS Universal Transverse Mercator Universal Polar Stereographic grids VAL Vertical Alarm Limit VAR Variation VER Version VFOM Vertical Figure of Merit V
288. t plan or direct to ETA estimate time of arrival The estimated time at which you will reach your destination waypoint based upon current speed and track ETE estimated time en route The time it will take to reach the destination waypoint from present position based upon current ground speed FF fuel flow The fuel flow rate expressed in fuel units per time e g gallons per hour FOB fuel on board The total amount of usable fuel on board the aircraft Geodesic an arc path that follows the shortest dis tance along an ellipsoid model of the earth WGS 84 A geodesic is more accurate than a great circle which assumes a perfect sphere model of the earth GS ground speed The velocity you are travelling relative to a ground position HDG heading The direction an aircraft is pointed based upon indications from a magnetic compass or a properly set directional gyro IND indicated Information provided by prop erly calibrated and set instrumentation in the aircraft panel e g indicated altitude 190 00357 00 Rev H 211 12 MESSAGES ABBREVIATIONS amp NAV TERMS LFOB left over fuel onboard The amount of fuel remaining on board after the completion of one or more legs of a flight plan or a direct to LRES left over fuel reserve The amount of fuel remaining on board after the completion of a one or more legs of a flight plan or a direct to exp
289. ta Fields On or Data Fields Off and press ENT 2 NAV PAGES Data Fields on the Map Selecting Desired On Screen Data Change Fields allows you to choose the data dis played on the five user selectable data fields along the right hand side of the map page see previous page There are a number of available data types including bearing to destination distance to destination esti mated time of arrival ground speed minimum sate altitude and track See Section 12 for descriptions of these and other navigation terms To change a data field 1 Press MENU with the Map Page displayed 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Change Fields and press ENT ETA Est Time Arvl peti ETE Est Time Enrte GS Ground Speed MSA Min Safe Alt TKE Track Ang Err TRK Track VSR Vert Spd Reqd a ATK Cross Track Err L Once Change Fields is selected turn the large right knob to highlight the data field you wish to change then turn the small right knob to select the type of data to display in that field 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight the data field you wish to change 4 Turn the small right knob to select the type of data you want to appear on this field and press ENT 5 Press the small right knob to remove the Cursor 190 00357 00 Rev H 41 2 NAV PAGES Restoring Factory Settings O NOTE The on screen traffic information TRFC oc cupies two d
290. tabase Confirmation Page appears next and shows the current database information on the NavData card with the valid operating dates cycle number and database type indicated The database is updated every 28 days and must be current for approved instrument approach operations Informa tion on database subscriptions is available inside your 500W series package To acknowledge the database information press the ENT key GARMIN GARMIN Power up Sequence 190 00357 00 Rev H 5 TAKEOFF TOUR Instrument Panel Self Test Check CDI HSI RMI and other in struments to verify these indications Set Full Fuel Go To Checklists Fuel Capacity is entered manually Fuel on board and fuel oe are provided manually or by sen sors if installed Select to Set Fuel Level to Full Capacity Should match current OBS course Select to display selection Checklists Page Instrument Panel Self Test To enter fuel capacity fuel on board or fuel flow Once the database has been acknowledged the gure uO DONE cet PET 1 Turn the large right knob to select the CAP Instrument Panel Self Test Page appears To ensure EOB or FE field ments are working properly check for the following the desired figure then press ENT indications on your CDI HSI RMI external annuncia tors and other connected instruments e Course deviation e Glideslope TO FROM flag Time to destination e Bearing to destination e Desired trac
291. tance CDI key disabled The installation has disabled the CDI key so that systems such as an EFIS connected to the 500W series unit will always have GPS deviation data on one output main and VLOC deviation data on the other output Nav See your installer for more information Check unit cooling The 500W series unit has detected excessive display backlighting temperature The back lighting has been automatically dimmed to reduce the tem perature Check for adequate ventilation or check cooling airflow Contact your Garmin dealer for assistance COM has failed GNS 530W only The unit has detected a failure in its communications transceiver The COM transceiver is not available and the unit should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service COM is not responding GNS 530W only Internal system to system communication between the main proces sor and the COM transceiver has failed Operational status of the COM transceiver is unknown and the unit should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service If the Com board is still working it will automatically tune to 121 500 MHz Transmit and receive functions may still operate regardless of the displayed frequency COM needs service GNS 530W only The unit has detected a failure in its communications transceiver The COM transceiver may still be usable but the unit should be returned at your earliest convenience to your Garmin dealer for service COM push
292. te the flight plan from the new database then make the desired modific ations Display backlight failure The 500W series unit has detected a failure in the display backlighting The unit should be taken to your Garmin dealer for service Do not use for navigation The 500W series unit is in Demo Mode and must not be used for actual navigation FPL has been truncated The flight plan FPL was truncated because not enough room existed to insert an approach departure or arrival This may occur upon power up when a database change increases the number of waypoints within an instrument procedure FPL is full remove unnecessary waypoints An attempt has been made to add more than 100 waypoints to a flight plan FPL The 500W series unit does not allow more than 100 waypoints per flight plan FPL waypoint is locked At least one flight plan FPL waypoint is locked because the waypoint has been removed from the current NavData card database change the data card is missing or the data card has failed FPL waypoint moved The position data for one or more flight plan FPL waypoints moved at least 0 33 arc minutes in the current NavData card database change G S has failed GNS 530W only The unit has detected a failure in its glideslope receiver The glideslope receiver is not available and the unit should be returned to your Garmin dealer for service 190 00357 00 Rev H 201 12 MESSAGES ABBRE
293. the VLOC receiver to the external CDI or HSI operation as selecting Load from the Procedures Page Select Approach option To load an approach from the Airport Approach Page 1 Select the desired approach and transition 2 Press MENU to display the Airport Approach Page Options Loud into Active FPL Load and Activate Select Approach Chnl iii From the Airport Approach Page press MENU to display an op tions list Select Load into Active FPL to load the approach for later use 3 Turn the large right knob to highlight Load into Active FPL and press ENT 4 The Active Flight Plan Page appears Press FPL to return to the Airport Approach Page Load and Activate allows you to load the selected approach into the active flight plan and activate navigation guidance to the approach transition 130 190 00357 00 Rev H 6 WPT PAGES Airport Approach Options To load and activate an approach from the Airport To select an approach channel from the Airport Approach Page follow the steps above but select Approach Page Load and Activate in step 3 1 Press MENU to display the Airport Approach Page Options Load into Active FPL 2 Load and Activate Turn the small or large right knob to high light Select Approach Chnl and then press ENT 3 Turn the small right knob to change values and the large right knob to move the cursor After selecting the WAAS approach channe
294. thin that group indicated by a highlighted square icon To select a different page within the group turn the small right knob See the 400W 500W Series Display Interfaces Pilot s Guide Addendum part number 190 00356 31 and the 400W 500W Series Garmin Optional Displays Pilot s Guide Addendum part number 190 00356 30 Default NAV Page During most flights the Default NAV Map and NAVCOM pages are the primary pages used for navi gation The Default NAV Page displays a look ahead map graphic course deviation indicator CDI the active leg of your flight plan as defined by the current from and to waypoints and four user selectable data fields The default settings for these fields are dis tance to waypoint DIS desired track DTK ground speed GS and estimated time en route ETE See Section 12 for definitions of these navigation terms The default NAV page is selected by pressing and hold ing the CLR key or turning the small right knob From the Default NAV Page simply turn the small right knob to display the available pages The NAVCOM Page displays the available frequencies communication and navigation for the departure airport any en route airports that are included in your flight plan and the final destination airport When using the direct to function frequencies are listed for the airport nearest to your starting position and the destination airport User selectable Data Fields all four co
295. tion L VNAV Lateral Navigation Vertical Navigation RNAV non precision approach with vertical Published LNAV VNAV guidance minimums LNAV Lateral Navigation RNAV non precision approach Published LNAV mini mums a light dashed line on the vertical profile Jeppeson only with an associated LPV Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance LPV approach Published LPV mini RNAV precision approach mums below applicable minimum descent altitude or decision LNAV V Lateral Navigation with Advisory Vertical Guidance RNAV non precision LNAV Published LNAV mini glidepath angle usually in the 3 00 degree range and is provided to assist the LP indicates Localizer Performance with no vertical guidance Published LP minimums height until criteria of FAR 91 175 are met approach with advisory vertical guidance The glidepath is typically denoted by mums pilot in maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope A NOTE Minimums will be controlling do not descend Points to Remember for ALL Approaches e The 500W series unit is designed to complement your printed approach plates and vastly improve situational awareness throughout the approach However you must always fly an approach as it appears on the approach plate SUSP indicates that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended In some instances SUSP automatically cancels hold ing pattern entry In other cases press OBS
296. tion to calculate density altitude true airspeed and winds aloft Scheduler displays reminder messages such as Change oil Switch fuel tanks Overhaul etc One time periodic and event based mes sages are allowed One time messages appear once the timer expires and reappear each time the 500W series unit is powered on until the message is deleted Periodic messages automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is dis played Event based messages do not use a timer but rather a specific date and time Crossfill Operation The Crossfill Function allows the pilot to transfer a direct to destination the active flight plan including VNAV param eters any stored flight plan a user waypoint or all user waypoints between two 500W Series or 400W Series Garmin units in a dual unit instal lation There is only one Crossfill function page It may be accessed pressing the MENU key and selecting Crossfill while viewing the detault Nav page Flight Plan Catalog Active Flight Plan User Waypoint page or the Aux mode Flight Planning page and then pressing ENT Waypoint names longer than six characters or dupli cates sent from the GTN unit to the GNS unit will cc 9 replace some characters with a sign while leaving significant characters to aid in identification such as USROO3 becomes US 003 A NOTE The databases of the 400 500 series and the 400W 500W are incompatible
297. to edit the new date or time entering the new value directly over the old figure Press ENT when finished To delete a scheduled message 1 Select Scheduler from the Flight Planning Page The flashing cursor highlights the first message field Turn the large right knob to highlight the desired message field Press CLR to delete the message text followed by ENT to confirm the deletion 9 AUX PAGES Flight Planning To perform Crossfill Select Crossfill from the Default NAV Page Flight Plan Catalog page Active Flight Plan page or the User Waypoint page by pressing MENU scrolling down to Crossfill with the large right knob and then pressing ENT On the Aux Flight Planning page scroll down to Crossfill with the large right knob and then press ENT BiCrossfill s s sa Enable Auto Zoom Change Fields Restore Defaults Display US NEXRAD Display CN NEXRAD Display RGN NEXRAD Display CONUS NEXRAD e Automatic Crossfill Operation If both units are set to automatic a change in the active flight plan or VNAV parameters on one unit can also be seen in the other Initiating a direct to course to a waypoint on one unit also initiates a direct to course to the same waypoint on the other unit If one unit is set for automatic crossfill and the other is set for manual crossfill then only the auto unit automatically sends data to the manual unit In this configurat
298. to talk key stuck GNS 530W only The external push to talk PTT switch is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the PTT switch again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact your Garmin dealer for assistance COM remote transfer key is stuck GNS 530W only The remote COM transfer switch is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the switch again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact your Garmin dealer for assistance 200 190 00357 00 Rev H COM transfer key stuck GNS 530W only The COM flip flop key is stuck in the enabled or pressed state Try pressing the COM flip flop key again to cycle its operation If the message persists contact your Garmin dealer for assistance COM transmitter power has been reduced GNS 530W only The unit has detected excessive unit tempera ture and or an insufficient voltage level The COM trans ceiver transmit power has been automatically reduced to compensate for the condition For excessive temperatures check for adequate ventilation or check cooling air flow If the message persists contact your Garmin dealer for assistance Configuration error Config service req d The con figuration information provided by the installer has been lost or corrupted Contact your Garmin dealer for service Data transfer cancelled crossfill is busy An attempt to transfer flight plan data during a unit
299. ull scale deflection is 2 0 but will be as defined series unit to automatically switch the external CDI for the approach from the GPS receiver to the VLOC receiver when intercepting the final approach course Or select manual to manually switch the external CDI connection as needed using the CDI key If the unit is installed with a KAP140 KFC225 autopilot 190 00357 00 Rev H automatic switching will not take place See AUX Setup 1 for ILS CDI Selection details CDI scales and corresponding flight phases En Route Terminal Maximum Approach For each scale phase to be available Selected CDI must be set to Auto An arrival alarm provided on the CDI Alarms Page may be set to notify you with a message when you have reached a user defined distance to the final destination the direct to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan Once you have reached the set distance up to 99 9 units an Arrival at waypoint message is displayed The Airspace Alarms fields allow you to turn the controlled special use airspace message alerts on or off This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspace Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the Map Page It simply turns on off the warning provided when you are approaching or near an airspace An altitude buffer is also provided which expands the vertical range above or below an airspace For example if the buf
300. ures Once the direct to or flight plan is confirmed the whole range of instrument procedures is available to you Departures SIDs arrivals STARs non preci sion and precision approaches are stored within the NavData card and available using the PROC key Press the PROC key to display the procedures page Turn the large right knob to select the desired option To display the Procedures Page press PROC The steps required to select and activate an approach departure or arrival are very similar In this introductory section we ll show examples of the steps required to select an approach but keep in mind the same process also applies to departures and arrivals To select an approach departure or arrival 1 Turn the large right knob to highlight the Select Approach option or Select Arrival Select Departure from the Pro cedures Page 2 Press ENT to display a list of available proce dures for the arrival when using approaches or STARs or departure when using SIDs airport TAKEOFF TOUR IFR Procedures 3 Turnthe small right knob to select the desired procedure and press ENT ILS 64 GPS 22 VOR DME 22 VOR 64 Activate A window appears to select the desired procedure Use the small right knob to make your selection 4 For approaches a window appears to select the desired initial approach fix IAF or a vectors option to select just the final course seg
301. urn the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the to waypoint and press ENT to accept the waypoint For direct to fuel planning press CLR with the from waypoint field highlighted to display P POS which repre 3b sents your present position For point to point fuel planning turn the small and large right knobs to enter the identitier of the trom waypoint Once the waypoint s OR 3C 8 190 00357 00 Rev H 9 AUX PAGES Flight Planning identifier is entered press ENT to accept the waypoint The flashing cursor moves to the to waypoint Again turn the small and large right knobs to enter the identifier of the to waypoint and press ENT to accept the waypoint For flight plan leg fuel planning turn the small right knob to select the desired flight plan already stored in memory by number Turn the large right knob to highlight the LEG field and turn the small right knob to select the desired leg of the flight plan or select Cum to apply fuel planning calculations to the entire flight plan If your fuel management system does not enter the data automatically turn the large right knob to highlight the fuel on board FOB field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the amount of fuel on board Press ENT when finished The flashing cursor moves to the fuel flow FF field Use the small and large right knobs to enter the fu
302. urn the small Waypoint Text right knob to select On or Off Press ENT nace Class B Class C Class D Restricted to accept the selected option The automatic i MOA Other TFR if GDL 69 equipped zoom feature automatically adjusts the map Large Medium Small Cities and Text scale from 2000 NM through each lower scale Ei State Province Boundaries Rivers Lakes stopping at 1 0 NM as you approach your destination waypoint 5 To enable disable all background land data or Jeppesen aviation data Turn the small right knob to select Map and press ENT Use the large right knob to highlight the appropri ate field and turn the small right knob to select On or Ott Press ENT to accept the selected option Weather and Traffic settings are only available when the 500W series unit installation includes connection to traffic and or weather information sources See 400W 500W Series Display Interfaces Pilot s Guide Addendum 190 00357 00 Rev H 39 2 NAV PAGES Distance Measurements 40 To enable disable the on screen wind vector Turn the small right knob to select Map and press ENT Use the large right knob to highlight the Wind Vector field and turn the small right knob to select On or Off Press ENT to accept the selected option For airports NAVAIDs active flight plan waypoints user created waypoints state pro vincial boundaries rivers lakes and cities Turn the small ri
303. view as well as Select a different data type from the list using their respective positions The outer circle of the sky Re ara OE RNOR view represents the horizon with north at the top NOTE Do not rely solely on MSA as an absolute of the circle the inner circle represents 45 above A measure of safe altitude Consult current charts and the horizon and the center point shows the position NOTAMS for your area directly overhead 4 Press ENT to select the desired data item and To change the user selectable data field return to the position page 1 Press MENU to display the Satellite Status Page 5 Press the small right knob momentarily to Options menu remove the cursor from the page 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight To restore the user selectable data field factory Change Fields and press ENT default setting 1 Press MENU to display the Satellite Status Page Options menu 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Restore Defaults and press ENT Restore Defaults By default current altitude ALT is displayed in the lower right corner of the page This field is user selectable using the Change Fields option 190 00357 00 Rev H 55 2 NAV PAGES Dead Reckoning Each satellite has a 30 second data transmission A NOTE Operating outside of an SBAS service area that must be collected hollow signal strength bar with SBAS enabled may cause elevated EPU values to m h ili i di lid be di
304. vigation frequencies at your departure en route and arrival airports The NAVCOM Page makes selection of the frequencies you ll need 2 along your flight plan quick and convenient If you do not have an active flight plan with a departure airport the NAVCOM Page displays the frequencies for the 3 airport nearest your departure position Assi F Departure En Route gant Frage Infonme or Arrival Airport tion when applicable Frequency Information is Type available 52 190 00357 00 Rev H or arrival airport 1 Press the small right knob to activate the Cursor Turn the large right knob to place the cursor on the airport identifier field top line on the NAVCOM Page Turn the small right knob to select the desired airport and press ENT ARRIVAL 118 400 113 98 ORD gat The NAVCOM Page lists available frequen cies for your departure en route and arrival airports 2 NAV PAGES NAVCOM Page To scroll through the list of frequencies To view usage restrictions for a frequency 1 Activate the cursor if not already active by 1 Turn the large right knob to place the cursor pressing the small right knob on the Info designation directly in front of 2 Turn the large right knob to move the cursor the desired frequency through the list of frequencies If there are more 2 Press ENT to display the restriction informa frequencies in the list than can be displayed on tion the screen a
305. ving process prevents having to re key a frequency already displayed else where on the screen To display the frequency list for the desired flight plan or direct to airport 1 Push the small right knob to activate the cursor on the airport identifier field in the GPS window Turn the small right knob to display the list of airports departure arrival and en route for your flight plan or direct to Continue to turn the small right knob until the desired airport is selected ARRIVAL 127 658 109 20 LYH HE2 Press ENT to display the frequency list tor the selected airport TAKEOFF TOUR NAVCOM Page Frequency Type Frequency List NAVCOM PAGE To select a communication or navigation fre quency 1 Push the small right knob to activate the cursor in the GPS window 2 Turn the large right knob to select the desired frequency trom the list 3 Press ENT to transfer the selected frequency to the standby field in the COM or VLOC window COM frequencies automatically go to the standby field of the COM window and navigation frequencies automatically go to the standby tield of the VLOC window regardless of the window currently highlighted by the Cursor 4 To activate the selected frequency press the COM or VLOC flip flop key 190 00357 00 Rev H 15 TAKEOFF TOUR Direct To Navigation Direct To Navigation 5 Press ENT to confirm the identifier The Acti The 500W series unit
306. vy Activate a When an approach is Loaded it is added to the end of the active flight plan Prior to reaching the approach course select Acti vate Approach to begin navigation along the approach course 1 Press the PROC key to display the Procedures Page 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Acti vate Approach and press ENT Another Procedures Page option allows you to activate the final course segment of the approach This option assumes you will receive vectors to the final approach course and guides you to intercept the final course before reaching the FAF To activate the previously loaded approach with vectors to final With the full approach Loaded select Activate Vectors To Final to provide navigation guidance along the final approach course segment only 1 Press the PROC key to display the Procedures Page 2 Turn the large right knob to highlight Acti vate Vectors To Final and press ENT In many cases it may be easiest to Load the full approach while still some distance away en route to the destination airport Later if vectored to final use the steps above to select Activate Vectors To Final which makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active Otherwise activate the full approach using the Activate Approach option If you reactivate the approach currently being flown using the PROC key prior to reaching the MAP a Restart
307. w RNAV GPS Z RWY 31 114 190 00357 00 Rev H Capture the glideslope as you would an ILS glideslope As you cross LOTKE the destination sequences to CUKEV and then the MAP RW31 the runway threshold With the needle on the external CDI or HSI centered fly toward the MAP observing the altitude minimums dictated by the approach plate After you cross the FAF LOTKE follow the guidance provided to the MAP RW31 When viewing the Map Page you ll note that the final course segment is displayed in magenta the active leg of the flight plan always appears in magenta As you approach the MAP a waypoint message Next DTK 312 in x sec appears on the bottom of the screen Once the unit crosses the MAP defined as the runway end waypoint sequencing will be suspended Prepare the aircraft for missed approach operation Press the OBS key to sequence to the Missed Approach procedure 5 PROCEDURES Flying the LP Approach After you cross the MAP and go to the MAHP follow the guidance provided 11 Fly the guidance provided by the unit to the ARTTY intersection and hold Flying the LP Approach LP approach capability is available for units with SW Version 3 30 or later An LP approach is flown the same as an LPV approach except that vertical guidance is not pro vided Angular scaling is similar to a localizer approach Most LP approaches have step down alti tudes associated with them 1 Within 30
308. y is au VLOC guidance tomatically placed in the standby VLOC frequency field Press the VLOC flip flop key to use this frequency e When flying a localizer based approach other than backcourse with automatic CDI switching enabled 190 00357 00 Rev H 119 5 PROCEDURES Enabling Autopilot Outputs Enabling Autopilot Outputs for the King KAP140 KFC225 Autopilot outputs for the King KAP140 KFC225 autopilots are activated manually by the pilot after being prompted during the approach procedure After enabling outputs the 500W series unit will provide guidance information consistent with what the autopilot expects i e angular CDI scaling and glideslope capture for an LPV or other vertically guided GPS approach 120 Conditions for autopilot outputs 1 The 500W series unit must be configured during installation to interface with these autopilots and using Prompt for GPS Select Guidance to the FAF is active as indicated by Approach mode annunciation LNAV LNAV V L VNAV or LPV To enable autopilot outputs 1 2 3 Load and activate approach information as usual When you are turned on course to the FAF Track and Desired Track are within 10 a message will prompt you to enable the autopilot outputs before using your autopilot for an approach Press PROC Highlight Enable A P APR Out puts with the large right knob if necessary and press ENT 190 00357 00 Rev H P
309. your present position Nearest Center ARTCC Page The Nearest Center Page displays the facility name bearing to and distance to the five nearest ARTCC points of communication within 200 NM of your present position For each ARTCC listed the Nearest Turn the small right knob to select the Center Page also indicates the frequency s and may be desired center then turn the large right knob used to quickly tune the COM transceiver to the cen to highlight the desired frequency ters frequency The selected frequency is placed in the standby field of the COM window and activated using 4 Turn the large right knob to scroll down the the COM flip flop key GNS 530W only page highlighting the desired trequency 5 Press ENT to place the selected trequency in the standby field of the COM window 190 00357 00 Rev H 155 7 NRST PAGES Nearest FSS Press ENT to place the frequency on standby Press the COM flip flop key to activate the selected frequency selected frequency 7 Press the small right knob to remove the flashing cursor Nearest Flight Service Station FSS Page The Nearest Flight Service Station Page displays the facility name bearing to and distance to the five nearest FSS points of communication within 200 NM of your present position For each FSS listed the Nearest Flight Service Station Page also indicates the trequency s and may be used to quickly tune the COM transceiver to the FSS s freque

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Garmin garmin garmin connect garmin express garmin watches garmin connect login garmin fenix 8 garmin inreach garmin gps garmin explore garmin dash cam garmin venu 3 garmin login garmin fenix 7 garmin watches for men garmin inreach mini 2 garmin instinct garmin express download garmin vivoactive 5 garmin instinct 2 garmin forerunner 55 garmin updates garmin forerunner 165 garmin express updates garmin connect app garmin forerunner 965

Related Contents

Scheda tecnica  Power Peak Fun.qxd  Service Manual for Exhibitors 78th Annual Meeting of the  Active Speaker System    Mode d`emploi court modèles S 962-2, S 962  Télécharger le mode d`emploi  Samsung Book 9 NP905S3G-K02BG User Manual (Windows8.1)  プロセスポンプ  STIRA E ASPIRA TOP M0S06167 1O08  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file